Concord V4.0 Beta Installation Manual
Concord v4.0 Beta Installation Manual Concord v4.0 Beta Installation Manual
User Manual: Concord v4.0 Beta Installation Manual AlarmHow.net Library
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 114 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
- Concord 4 Security Systems
- Table B1: Sensor Group Characteristics
- Table B2: Item Numbers and Sensor Text
- Table B3: System Event Trigger Numbers
- Table B4: Sensor Group Event Trigger Numbers
- Table B5: Sensor Number Event Trigger Numbers
- Table B6: System Feature Event Trigger Numbers
- Table B7: Response Characteristics
- Table B8: Response Numbers
- Notes for Table B8: Response Numbers
- Note The mechanical lifetime of the relay may be exceeded if an output is set up for a siren tracking response and a pulsing siren (auxiliary or fire) is active for long time periods. A SnapCard relay output’s lifetime expectancy is about 350...
- 1. If an event does not trigger sirens, siren tracking response numbers activate without turning on the output. If sirens are triggered by another event, the output pulses to match the siren.
- 2. If an event does not trigger sirens, siren time response times activate outputs only if sirens are active for another reason.
- 3. If an alarm event does not necessarily require disarming (no activity, closing report, etc.), outputs set up for a sustained response time remain activated until the next arming level change.
- 4. If an event occurs that activates an output set up for trip delay, the delay and output activa tion can be canceled by trigger event restoral.
- Note The trip delay is factory set for 30 seconds and cannot be changed.
- Note UL requirements take prior ity over SIA requirements.
- Note For UL 1635 installations, Entry Delay plus Dialer Abort Delay must not exceed 60 seconds.
- Note For 24-hour backup, exter nal power drain is limited to 90 mA (during normal standby condition) using a 4.0 AH battery, or 200 mA continuous using a 7.0 AH battery.
- California State Fire Marshall Listed Installations
- Planning the Installation
- Standard Panel
- SuperBus 2000 Touchpads
- SuperBus 2000 RF Transceiver
- Power Line Carrier Transformer
- SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice Module
- SnapCards
- SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Module (HIM)
- SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Module (HOM)
- Interrogator 200 Audio Verification Module
- SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module
- SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module (ESM)
- SuperBus 2000 Automation Module
- SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway-Ready Kit
- SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply
- Dialog RF Electronic Thermostat
- Dialog RF Siren
- Dialog RF Iconized LCD Touchpad
- Installing the System
- Note (A) Class 2, Class 3, and power-limited fire alarm cir cuits must be installed using FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or substi tute cable permitted by the National Electrical Code ANSI/NFPA 70. Wire that extends beyond the cable jacket must be separate...
- Determine the Panel Location
- Total System Power and Wire Length Guidelines
- Mounting the Panel
- 1. Remove the panel door and remove the necessary wiring knockouts. Be careful not to dam age the circuit board.
- 2. Feed all wires through wiring knockouts and place the panel in position against the wall.
- 3. Level the panel and mark the top and bottom mounting holes.
- 4. Install anchors where studs are not present.
- 5. Partially insert screws into the two top mounting hole locations, then hang the panel on the two screws.
- 6. Recheck for level, insert the two lower screws, and tighten all four mounting screws.
- Identify Panel Components
- Note For best results, it is recom mended that you crimp a spade lug on the wire end at the panel and secure the lug to the enclosure as shown in Figure 5.
- Note The panel comes with fac tory programmed onboard hardwire zones. Install 2k-ohm, end of line (EOL) resistors on all unused fac tory programmed onboard hardwire zones. If you don’t want to install EOL resistors, delete any unused zones fr...
- Note The Two-Wire Smoke set ting (in program mode) must be off when using 4-wire smoke detectors. See onboard options-inputs in the section “Programming the Panel” for complete details.
- Note Zone 8 must be learned into sensor group 26 (fire) for connected smoke detectors to reset after canceling a fire alarm.
- Note Install all sirens/speakers indoors, in a concealed loca tion.
- Note Even if you don’t plan to mount modules inside the cabinet, install the support standoffs for future use and to avoid losing them.
- Note Do not connect power (AC and battery) to the power supply until the panel is ready for power up. For power supply AC and bat tery connections, see the SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply Installation Instructions.
- Note In UL Listed installations, the Phone Interface/Voice Mod ule is for supplementary use only.
- Note For RJ-31X connections, see “Installing an RJ-31X Phone Jack (13-081).
- Note To prevent status voice mes sages from being broadcast outside, do not connect exterior speakers to Phone Interface/Voice module ter minals 6 and 7.
- Wiring for Status Voice Messages Only
- Wiring for Status and Alarm Messages
- SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module (60-620-01)
- SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Module (60-774)
- SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Module (60-770)
- SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module
- SuperBus 2000 Automation Module (60-783-02)
- SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway-Ready Kit (600-1010)
- Note The panel cannot be used on a digital or PBX phone line. These systems are designed for digital type devices only, operating any where from 5 volts DC and up. The panel uses an ana log modem and does not have a digital converter, adapter...
- Note Connecting the panel to an analog line off the phone switch places the panel ahead of the phone system, preventing panel access from phones on the pre mises. However, the panel can still be accessed from off-site phones.
- 1. Run a 4-conductor cable from the TELCO protector block to the jack location (see A in Fig ure 26).
- 2. Connect one end of the cable to the jack (see B in Figure 26).
- 3. At the TELCO protector block, remove the premises phone lines from the block and splice them to the black and white (or yellow) wires of the 4-conductor cable (see C in Figure 26).
- 4. Connect the green and red wires from the 4-conductor cable to the TIP (+) and RING (-) posts on the block (see D in Figure 26).
- 5. Check the phones on the premises for dial tone and the ability to dial out and make phone calls. If phones do not work correctly, check all wiring and correct where necessary. Proceed to the “Troubleshooting” section of this manual if prob...
- Connecting the Phone Line to the Panel with a DB-8 Cord
- 1. Connect the green, brown, gray, and red flying leads from the DB-8 cord to panel terminals 24, 25, 26, and 27.
- 2. Insert the DB-8 cord’s plug into the RJ-31X.
- 3. Check the phones on the premises for dial tone and the ability to dial out and make phone calls. If phones do not work correctly, check all wiring and correct where necessary. Proceed to the “Troubleshooting” section of this manual if prob...
- Connecting the AC Power Transformer
- Powering Up the Panel
- Note If alphanumeric touchpads don’t display anything, immediately unplug the transformer and disconnect the backup battery. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” sec tion.
- 4. To permanently mount the transformer, unplug it and remove the existing screw securing the AC outlet cover. Hold the outlet cover in place and plug the transformer into the lower receptacle.
- 5. Use the screw supplied with the transformer to secure the transformer to the outlet cover.
- Programming the Panel
- Note If the system is powered up after the programming touchpad is connected or if a bus command scan is exe cuted, the programming touchpad will be “learned” into the system and must later be manually deleted.
- 1. Make sure the system is disarmed in all partitions.
- 2. Press 8 + 4321 + 0 + 0. The display shows SYSTEM PROGRAMMING.
- 1. Connect the red, black, green, and white wires from the Programming Touchpad Cable (60-791) to the power and bus wires/terminals on an alphanumeric touchpad, matching the +12V (red), Bus A (green), Bus B (white), and GND (black) on each.
- 2. Make sure the system is powered up and disarmed.
- 3. Connect the plug on the cable onto the panel programming touchpad header (see Figure 28).
- 4. Press 8 + 4321 + 0 + 2. The touchpad sounds one short beep. Press * and verify that the dis play shows SERVICE TOUCHPAD ACTIVE.
- 5. Press 8 + 4321 + 0 + 0 and the display shows SYSTEM PROGRAMMING.
- 6. After programming is completed, simply disconnect the touchpad from the panel header.
- Touchpad Button Programming Functions
- Moving Through Program Mode Tiers and Menus
- Programming Tier 1 Menu Items
- Note Clearing the memory will erase onboard hardwire zone factory programming.
- 1. With the system in program mode, press A or B until the display shows CLEAR MEMORY.
- 2. Press # and the display shows ENTER CODE TO CLEAR MEMORY.
- 3. Enter the 4-digit installer or dealer code (if programmed) + #. After about five seconds, the system restarts and the panel scans the bus to learn all bus devices.
- Programming Tier 2 Menu Items
- Note The Downloader Code cannot be deleted from panel memory. To change the Downloader Code to its default setting, enter 12345 in the procedure to the right. The Downloader Code will be reset to defaults during a Memory Clear only if the Dea...
- Note The Installer Code cannot be deleted or cleared from panel memory. To change the Installer Code to its default setting, enter 4321.
- Note The Dealer Code cannot be deleted by clearing panel memory.
- 1. With the display showing DEALER CODE ****, enter the desired 4-digit code. The display flashes the entered code.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new code.
- 1. With the display showing DEALER CODE nnnn (current code), press D. The display shows DEALER CODE ****.
- 1. With the display showing ACCESS CODE LOCK ON/OFF, press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Partition Security (0004)
- Note Regardless of the setting, an access code can always be used to jump partitions.
- 1. With the display showing PTN SECURITY (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Multi-Partition Arm/Disarm (0005)
- 1. With the display showing MULTI-PTN ARM/DISARM _, press 1-6 to enter the desired partitions (at least two). The dis play flashes the entered partitions.
- 2. Press # and the display stops flashing.
- 1. With the display showing MULTI-PTN ARM/DISARM n n n n n n n, select all of the displayed partitions by entering the appropriate partition number. The parti tion numbers disappear from the display.
- 2. Press #.
- Keychain TP PTN (0006)
- 1. Learn all keychain touchpads into panel memory (see LEARN SENSORS menu).
- 2. Enter this menu (display showing KEYCHAIN TP PTN), then press #. The display shows the lowest touchpad sensor number assignment such as: S1 P1 G0 TP RF where S1 is sensor 1, P1 is partition 1, G0 is sensor group 0, TP is touchpad and RF is wireless.
- 3. Press # to accept this keychain touchpad or press A or B until the desired keychain touch pad appears, then press #. The display shows ARM PARTITION.
- 4. Enter the desired partitions 1-6 (at least two). The display flashes the entered parti tions.
- 5. Press # and the display stops flashing.
- 1. Follow steps 2 and 3 above.
- 2. Enter the partition numbers that are displayed (except for the partition you assigned the touchpad when it was learned). Each will dis appear from the display with the touchpad’s original partition number left flashing.
- 3. Press # and the display stops flashing.
- SIA False Alarm Reduction (0007)
- Note The siren output must be configured for “Exterior Siren” (016xx) and on the two onboard outputs and SnapCard outputs only, for the arming level beeps to be annunciated.
- 1. With the display showing SIA FALSE ALARM (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered set ting.
- 2. Press É and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing ACCOUNT NUM BER nnnnn (current number), enter the desired account number. The display flashes the entered number.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new number.
- 1. With the display showing QUICK ARM OFF/ ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- Note For UL Listed installations, this feature must be set to off.
- Note Arming the system to “AWAY with No Delay” overrides the Auto Stay Arming feature.
- Note It is recommended that keyswitch sensors are learned into group 28.
- Note A bypassed keyswitch sensor cannot arm or disarm the system.During an audible alarm, keyswitch sensors can disarm the system (which sends a cancel report to the central monitoring station), but cannot arm the system. The system can be ar...
- 1. With the display showing KEYSWITCH SENSOR nn (current sensor number), enter the desired sensor number (01- 96). The display flashes the entered sensor number.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new number.
- 1. With the display showing KEYSWITCH SENSOR nn (current sensor number), press D to erase the keyswitch sensor attribute.
- 1. With the display showing KEYSWITCH STYLE TRANSITION/STATE (current setting), press 1 for Transition or 2 for State. The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- Duress Code (0017 - 0067)
- Note To use this feature, the Duress Option setting under the reporting-partition 1 (2) menu must be turned on.
- Note The phone number menus are not accessible if a Dealer Code is programmed and the Installer Code is used to enter installer programming mode. To access these menus when a Dealer Code is programmed, you must enter installer programming mod...
- 1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER _ (or current number), enter the desired phone number. The display flashes the entered number.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new number.
- 1. With the display showing HIGH LEVEL RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- 1. With the display showing LOW LEVEL RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- 1. With the display showing EXCEPTION RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note To use this feature, the Opening Reports and Closing Reports settings under the REPORTING menu must be turned on for that partition.
- 1. With the display showing OPEN/CLOSE RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- 1. With the display showing BACK UP OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- 1. With the display showing REPORTING FORMAT SIA/CID (current setting), press 1 (for SIA) or 2 (for CID). The display flashes the entered set ting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing CELLULAR BACKUP, press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note Call-waiting services should be disabled to prevent interrupting panel commu nication to the pager(s). To program a dialing prefix that disables call-waiting, see the Call Wait Cancel setting under the menu PHONE OPTIONS-GLOBAL.
- 1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER _ (or current number), enter the desired pager phone number. The display flashes the entered number.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER (current number), press D. The display shows PHONE NUMBER _.
- 1. With the display showing HIGH LEVEL RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- 1. With the display showing LOW LEVEL RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- 1. With the display showing EXCEPTION RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note To use this feature, the opening reports and closing reports settings under the reporting menu must be turned on for that partition.
- 1. With the display showing OPEN/CLOSE RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing LATCHKEY RPTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing STREAMLINING OFF/ ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing PTN ASSIGNMENT 1/2/ 12 (current setting), press 1-6 to select the desired partitions. The display flashes the entered settings.
- 2. Press # and the display stops flashing.
- Note Call-waiting services should be disabled to prevent interrupting panel commu nication to the downloader. To program a dialing prefix that disables call-wait ing, see the Call Wait Cancel setting under the menu PHONE OPTIONS- GLOBAL.
- 1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER (cur rent number), enter the desired phone number. The display flashes the entered number.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER (cur rent number), press D to erase the number. The display shows PHONE NUMBER_.
- Phone Options Menu
- 1. With the display showing PHONE TEST OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUTO PHONE TEST OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- Note Phone Test Freq must be set to 2 or higher for Auto Test Reset to work.
- Note For UL Listed installations, Comm Failure must be turned on.
- 1. With the display showing COMM FAILURE OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing DTMF DIALING OFF/ ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Dialer Abort (02006)
- Note Fire alarm reports to the central station cannot be aborted.
- Note The Pager Delay time should not be set below 5 seconds, unless absolutely necessary.
- Note There is no Dial Tone Detect on the last dialing attempt.
- 1. With the display showing DIAL TONE DETECT OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing LOCAL PHONE CTRL OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing REMOTE ACCESS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note The Remote Access setting must be turned on for this feature to work.
- 1. Listen for one or two full rings.
- 2. Hang up.
- 3. Call the premises again within the next 10-40 seconds. The system answers after the first ring.
- 1. With the display showing RING/HANG/ RING OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display begins flash ing the entered selection.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new set ting.
- Note Line Fail Delay is not available for partitions 2-6 at this time.
- 1. With partition 1 selected, press A or B until the display shows LINE FAIL DELAY nn SECS (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired time value (10-240 seconds). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With partition 1 selected, press A or B until the display shows LINE FAIL DELAY nn SECS (current setting).
- 2. Press D to delete the current line fail delay time.
- 1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B until the dis play shows TOLL SAVER OFF/ON (current setting).
- 2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B until the display shows PHONE PANIC OFF/ON (current setting).
- 2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note Use the default setting (#) to avoid conflicts between the security system and other phone devices and services. Many phone devices (such as answering machines, computer modems, and FAX machines) and services (such as call-waiting, call-...
- Note The panel clock must be set with the correct time for accurate supervisory time reporting. See “Time and Date Menu”.
- Note For UL 985, 1610 & 1635 listed installations, the RF Tx Timeout must be set to 4 hours. For UL 1023 listed installations, the RF Tx Timeout must be set to 24 hours.
- 1. With the display showing RF TX TIME OUT nn HOURS (current setting), enter the desired timeout value (2-24). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing PHONE TEST FREQ nnn DAYS (current setting), enter the number of days (1-255). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing NEXT PHONE TEST nnn DAYS (current setting), enter the number of days (1-255). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing OUTPUT TRIP TIME nn SECS (current setting), enter the number of seconds (1-12). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing ACTIVITY TIMEOUT nn HOURS (current setting), enter the number of hours (1-42). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing DAYLIGHT SAVING OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Entry Delay (0310 - 0360)
- Note For UL 1023 Listed installations, the Entry Delay must be set to 45 seconds or less. The combined time for the Entry Delay and Dialer Abort Delay (02006) must not exceed 60 seconds.
- Note For UL 1023 listed installations, this feature must be set to 60 seconds or less. For UL 1610 listed installations, this feature must be set to 120 seconds or less.
- Note For UL Listed installations Extended Delay may not be used.
- Note For UL Listed installations, the Siren Timeout must be set to 4 min utes or more.
- 1. With the display showing SIREN TIMEOUT nn MINUTES (current setting), enter the desired time value (1-30). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display show the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing SLEEP TIME hh:mm (cur rent setting), enter the desired time value (00:00- 23:50 using 10 minute intervals). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display show the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing SLEEP TIME hh:mm (cur rent setting), press D.
- 1. With the display showing NO USAGE TIME (cur rent setting), enter the desired number in days (2- 255). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display show the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing NO USAGE TIME (cur rent setting), press D.
- Light Control Menu
- Note For light control to work, the panel must be powered with a power line carrier trans former and X10 Powerhouse Lamp Modules must be installed at desired lamps.
- Note X10 Lamp Modules set to 1 always turn on during the entry and exit delays. X10 Lamp Modules set to 2 always flash the arming level when arming the system. For example, lights flash two times when arm ing to STAY (level 2), and three time...
- 1. With the desired partition selected, press #. The display shows ENTRY LIGHTS nnnnnnn (current setting).
- 2. Enter all the desired light numbers (3-9 based on the UNIT dial setting on each X10 Lamp Module). The dis play flashes the entered setting(s). Press # and the dis play shows the new setting(s).
- 1. Enter any light number that appears on the display, then press #. The number disappears from the display.
- 1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B until the display shows HOUSE CODE nn-x (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired number (1-255). The display flashes the entered number. Press # and the dis play shows the new house code.
- Touchpad Options Menu
- 1. With the display showing LATCHKEY ZONES nnn (current set ting), enter the desired number of latchkey zones (1-96). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing LATCHKEY ZONES nnn (current set ting), press D.
- 1. With the display showing FIRE PANIC OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis play flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUXILIARY PANIC OFF/ ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing POLICE PANIC OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis play flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing KEYCHAIN TP ARM OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing STAR IS NO DELAY OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Reporting Menu
- Note For commercial UL Listed installations (UL 1610) the 24-Hour Tamper must be set to on.
- 1. With the display showing 24 HOUR TAMPER OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing ANTENNA TAMPER OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing BUFFER CONTROL OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing BACK IN SERVICE OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing BYPASS REPORTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note For UL 1635 listed installations, the Low CPU Battery feature must be set to on.
- 1. With the display showing LOW CPU BATTERY OFF/ ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis play flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing BATTERY RESTORAL OFF/ ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis play flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing BUFFER FULL RPT OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note As with all GE Interlogix panels, hardwire smoke detectors connected to Concord or SnapCard hardwire zones do not send restorals.
- Note For UL Listed installations, the Two Trip Error feature must be set to off.
- 1. With the display showing TWO TRIP ERROR OFF/ON (current set ting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered set ting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing TP PANIC RPT FMT OFF/ ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note For UL Listed installations, AC Failure must be set to on.
- Note For UL Listed installations using wireless devices, Receiver Failure must be set to on.
- 1. With the display showing RECEIVER FAILURE OFF/ ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis play flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing RF LOW BAT RPT DAILY/ WEEKLY (current setting), press 1 (daily) or 2 (weekly). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing RF SUPV REPORT DAILY/ WEEKLY (current setting), press 1 (daily) or 2 (weekly). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Swinger Limit (06015)
- 1. With the display showing SWINGER LIMIT n (current setting), press the desired number (1-2). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUX POWER FAIL ON/OFF (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note To use this feature, the Open/Close Reports settings under the phones menu must be turned on for the specific CS Phone or Pager number.
- Note To use this feature, the Open/Close Reports settings under the phones menu must be turned on for the specific CS Phone or Pager number.
- 1. With the display showing CLOSING REPORTS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing RECENT CLOSINGS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing NO ACTIVITY OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis play flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note For UL Listed installations, Duress Option must be set to off.
- Note Forced arming occurs if the user presses BYPASS when arming the system with open sensors/zones protesting. Auto-forced arming occurs when the user does not press BYPASS when arming the sys tem with open sensors/zones protesting, then lea...
- 1. With the display showing FORCE ARMED OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B until the display shows LATCHKEY FORMAT OFF/ON (current setting).
- 2. Press 1 (off-basic) or 2 (on- advanced). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the dis play shows the new setting.
- 1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B until the display shows FREEZE ALARM OFF/ON (current setting).
- 2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B until the display shows FREEZE TEMP (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired temperature (40-90). The dis play flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Alarm Verify (06109 - 06609)
- Note For UL Listed installations, Alarm Verify must be set to off.
- Note For UL Commercial Listed installations (UL 1610), System Tamper must be set to on.
- 1. With the display showing SYSTEM TAMPER OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing REPORT CONFIRM OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Siren Options Menu
- Note For UL Listed installations, this feature must be on.
- 1. With the display showing IMMEDIATE BEEPS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing DISABLE TR BEEPS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note For UL Listed installations, this feature must be on.
- 1. With the display showing UL 98 OPTIONS OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis play flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing GLOBAL FIRE OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis play flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing GLOBAL SILENT PANIC OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note For UL Listed installations, Siren Verify must be set to on.
- Note The panel comes with factory programmed onboard hard wire zones. Install 2k-ohm, end of line (EOL) resistors on all unused factory programmed onboard hardwire zones. If you don’t want to install EOL resistors, delete any unused zones fro...
- 1. With the display showing SENSORS, press # and the display shows LEARN SENSORS.
- 2. Press # and the display shows SENSOR PTN 1.
- 3. Press # to select partition 1 or press 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 + # to select the desired partition. The display should show SENSOR GROUP 0.
- 4. Enter the desired sensor group + # (see Table B1 in “Appendix B” for a description of all sensor group characteristics). The display shows TRIP SENSOR nn, where nn is the displayed (next available) sensor number.
- 5. To change the displayed sensor number, enter the desired sen sor number + #. The desired sensor number is displayed.
- 6. With the desired sensor number displayed, use the guidelines in Table 6 to force the sensor or zone you are adding (learning) into the panel memory to send a signal to the panel.
- 7. To add another sensor to the same sensor group and partition, go back to step 5.
- 8. To add sensors to another sensor group or partition, press * twice and go back to step 1 (LEARN SENSORS).
- Table 7: Onboard Hardwire Zone Factory Programming
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows SENSOR TEXT.
- 2. Press # and the display shows TEXT FOR SN 01.
- 3. Press A or B until the display shows the desired sensor number (or enter the desired sensor number and press #).
- 4. Press # and the display shows: SN 1 ITEM 0 0 - ________. Where ITEM 0 is the first character/word location and 0 is the character/word number.
- 5. Enter the number of the desired character or word, or scroll through the numbers by pressing B (forward) or A (backward). If you make a mistake, simply enter the cor rect number or continue scrolling through choices.
- 6. Press # to accept the displayed choice and the display shows: SN 1 ITEM 1 0 -.____
- 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed to complete the zone or sensor name.
- 8. Press * after entering the last character or word number. The display shows the complete text name. For example: TEXT FOR SN 01 FRONT ENTRY DOOR
- Note Deleting sensors does not delete sensor text associated with the deleted sensor number. To delete sensor text, enter the sensor text menu and enter 000 (nulls) for each item number.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows DELETE SENSORS.
- 2. Press # and the display shows DELETE SENSOR nn (lowest zone/sensor number in panel memory).
- 3. Press # to delete the displayed sensor or-enter the desired sensor number, then press #.
- 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all desired sensors are deleted.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows EDIT SENSORS.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the sensor or zone with the lowest number.
- 3. Press A or B to scroll through all learned zones and sensors.
- 4. When the desired zone or sensor is displayed, press #. The display shows SENSOR PTN n (current partition assignment).
- 5. Enter the desired partition number, then press #. The display shows the new partition assignment.
- 6. Press A or B and the display shows SENSOR GROUP nn (current group assignment).
- 7. Enter the desired group number, then press #. The display shows the new group assignment.
- Audio Verification Menu
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFICATION, press #. The display shows PARTITION 1.
- 2. Press # again and the display shows AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON (current setting).
- 3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows AUDIO MODE nn (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired mode number (1-3). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows FIRE SHUTDOWN OFF/ON (current setting).
- 2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows SILENT TALKBACK OFF/ON (current setting).
- 2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows ACCESS TIMEOUT nn SECS (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired time. The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows BEEP DELAY nn SECS (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired time. The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows ACCESS CODE nnnn (current code).
- 2. Enter the desired 4-digit access code. The display flashes the entered code. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows ACCESS CODE nnnn (current code).
- 2. Press D to delete.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows VOX MIC GAIN nn (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired 2-digit setting (01 - 64). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows VOX GAIN RANGE nn (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired 2-digit setting (01 - 64). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until the display shows VOX RX GAIN nn (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired 2-digit setting (01 - 10). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Accessory Modules Menu
- Note Most settings under ACCESSORY MODULES-BUS DEVICES have no shortcut numbers.
- 1. With the display showing BUS DEVICES, press #. The display shows the bus Unit Number and the 8-digit Device ID number. For exam ple: UNIT - ID 0-02110185. Where 0 is the Unit Number and 02110185 is the Device ID number.
- 2. Press A or B to identify all other bus Unit Numbers (0-15) and Device ID numbers.
- 1. With the display showing BUS DEVICES, press #. The display shows the bus device set to Unit Number 0.
- 2. Press A or B until the bus device Unit Number you want to delete is displayed.
- 3. Press D. The display changes the Unit Number to NONE.
- 1. With the display showing the desired bus device, press # + #. The display shows DEVICE ID (current ID).
- 2. Enter the ID of the new bus device. The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 3. Exit programming mode.
- 4. Remove AC and battery power from the panel.
- 5. Replace the defective bus device with a new one.
- 6. Apply AC and battery power to the panel.
- Note SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Modules, SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Modules, and SuperBus 2000 RF Receivers are not assigned to partitions.
- 1. With the display showing the desired bus device, press #.
- 2. Press A or B until the display shows DEVICE PTN and then press #. The display shows PARTITION ASSIGN n.
- 3. Press 1-6 to select the desired partition. The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note HOM output points cannot be configured for user control. Only the onboard and Snap Card outputs can be configured for user control.
- 1. With the display showing the desired bus device, press #.
- 2. Press A or B until the display shows OUTPUTS.
- 3. Press #. The display shows OUTPUT 1.
- 4. Press A or B to select an output, then press #. The display shows PARTITION ASSIGN 1.
- 5. Press 1-6 to select the desired partition assignment for this relay. The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 6. Press A or B. The display shows CONFIGURATION tttrr (current setting).
- 7. Enter the desired 5-digit configuration number for this relay. The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 8. Press # and repeat steps 4 through 8 until all outputs are programmed
- Note For UL Listed installations, Status Beeps must be set to on.
- 1. With the display showing the desired touchpad, press # then A or B until the display shows KEYPAD OPTIONS.
- 2. Press # and the display shows STATUS BEEPS OFF/ON (cur rent setting).
- 3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on) to select the desired setting. The dis play flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing the desired touchpad, press # then A or B until the display shows KEYPAD OPTIONS. Next, press # then A or B until the display shows KEY BEEPS OFF/ON (current setting).
- 2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on) to select the desired setting. The dis play flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing the desired bus device press #, then A or B until the display shows ENERGY OPTIONS. Next, press # then A or B until the display shows FREEZE TEMP nn DEGREES (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired freeze temperature (40˚-90˚ F). The dis play flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note To ensure accuracy, wait at least 15 minutes before setting the ESM temperature to allow the ESM to warm or cool to actual room temperature.
- 1. With the display showing the desired bus device press #, then A or B until the display shows ENERGY OPTIONS. Next, press # and then A or B until the display shows TEM PERATURE nn DEGREES (current setting).
- 2. Enter the desired temperature (40˚-90˚ F). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing the desired bus device press 1, (B) or 2 (A). The display flashes the entered selection.
- 2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. Assign the partition (1-6).
- 2. Assign the configuration number (combination of a trigger number and a response number.
- 1. With the display showing SNAPCARDS, press #. Then press A or B until the display shows OUTPUT PROGRAMMING.
- 2. Press # again and the display shows OUTPUT 1.
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired output (1-4), then press #.
- 4. With the display showing PARTITION ASSIGN 1, press 1-6 to select the desired partition. Press # to confirm the partition.
- 5. Press A or B until the display shows CONFIGURATION tttrr (current setting).
- 6. Enter the desired 5-digit configuration number for this relay. Press # to confirm the setting.
- 7. Press # and repeat steps 3 through 6 until all outputs are pro grammed.
- Note If you desire an output for User Output Control you must use the Output Text feature to name the output. If no Output Text is pro grammed, the user will not have access to the output.
- 1. With the display showing SNAPCARDS, press #, then A or B until the display shows OUTPUT TEXT.
- 2. Press # and the display shows OUTPUT 1.
- 3. Press A or B until the desired output number is dis played.
- 4. Press # and the display shows: OUTPUT N ITEM 0 0 - .Where ITEM 0 is the first character/word location and 0 is the character/word number.
- 5. Enter the number of the desired character or word, or scroll through the numbers by pressing B (forward) or A (back ward). If you make a mistake, simply enter the correct number or continue scrolling through choices.
- 6. Press # to accept the displayed choice and the display shows: OUTPUT N ITEM 1 0 -.
- 7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed to complete the output name.
- 8. Press * after entering the last character or word number. The display shows the complete text name. For example: OUTPUT 1 GARAGE DOOR.
- Onboard Options Menu
- Smoke Verify (1100)
- Note RF smoke detectors repeat the alarm transmission every 60 sec onds as long as they are detecting smoke. This repeated transmis sion will serve as the second zone trip, causing the alarm to be reported.
- Note For California State Fire Marshall Listed installations, this feature must be off.
- 1. With the display showing ONBOARD OPTIONS, press # twice. The display shows SMOKE VERIFY OFF/ON (current setting).
- 2. Press A or B until the display shows TWO WIRE SMOKE ON/OFF (current setting).
- 3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered number. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note If you want to configure an output for user Output Control you must use the Output Text feature to name the output. If no Out put Text is programmed, user Output Control will not function for that output.
- 1. With the display showing ONBOARD OPTIONS, press # + B. The display shows OUTPUT PROGRAMMING.
- 2. Press # and the display shows OUTPUT 1. Press B to select OUTPUT 2.
- 3. Press # and the display shows PARTITION ASSIGN n (current setting).
- 4. Press 1-6 to assign the output to the desired partition, then press #. The display shows PARTITION ASSIGN (new setting).
- 5. Press B and the display shows CONFIGURATION tttrr (current setting).
- 6. Enter the desired configuration number. The display flashes the entered number. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 7. Press # and repeat steps 2 through 6 until all outputs are pro grammed.
- Note If you want to configure an output for user Output Control you must use the Output Text feature to name the output. If no Out put Text is programmed, Output Control will not function for that output.
- 1. With the display showing ONBOARD OPTIONS, press # then press B twice and the display shows OUTPUT TEXT.
- 2. Press # and the display shows OUTPUT 1.
- 3. Press # and the display shows: OUTPUT 1 ITEM 0 0 -. Where ITEM 0 is the first character or word location and 0 is the character or word number.
- 4. Enter the number of the desired character or word, or scroll through the numbers by pressing B (forward) or A (back ward). If you make a mistake, simply enter the correct num ber or continue scrolling through choices.
- 5. Press # to accept the displayed choice and the display shows: OUTPUT 1 ITEM 1 0 -.
- 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed to complete the output name.
- 7. Press * after entering the last character or word number. The display shows the complete text name. For example: OUT PUT 1 GARAGE DOOR.
- Macro Keys Menu
- 1. With the display showing MACRO KEYS, press #. The display shows PAR TITION 1.
- 2. Press A or B to select the desired par tition (1-6), then press #. The display shows MACRO KEY 1 (current setting).
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired macro key you want to program (1-4).
- 4. To change this macro, press the asso ciated macro key. The current setting disappears and is replaced with a flashing cursor.
- 5. Enter the desired system command. The display flashes the entry.
- 6. Press the macro key again to accept the entered command. The display stops flashing.
- Exiting Programming Mode
- Entering Quick Programming Mode
- Entering User Programming Mode
- Note Setting the time and date is important for accurate track ing of system events stored in the event buffer.
- 1. With the display showing TIME AND DATE, press # and the display shows TIME hh:mm (current time).
- 2. Enter the correct time (0000-2359). The display flashes the entered time. Press # and the display shows the new time.
- 1. With the display showing TIME AND DATE, press #, then A or B until the display shows DATE nn/nn/nn (current date).
- 2. Enter the correct month (01-12), day (01-31), and year (00-99). For example, enter 090100 for September 1, 2000. The display flashes the entered date. Press # and the display shows the new date.
- User Codes Menu
- 1. With the display showing user codes, press # and the display shows regular user codes.
- 2. Press # and the display shows user nnn (first available user number).
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows user nnn - nnnn.
- 4. With the desired user number displayed, enter a 4-digit user code. The display flashes the entered code. Press # and the display shows user nnn - nnnn (new code).
- 1. With the display showing user codes, press # and the display shows regular user codes.
- 2. Press # and the display shows user nnn - nnnn (first available user number).
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired user number/user code you want to delete (if it is not already displayed), then press #. The display shows user nnn - nnnn.
- 4. Enter the system or partition master code. The display flashes the entered code. Press # and the display shows user nnn -- **** (no code).
- 1. With the display showing user codes, press # and the display shows regular user codes.
- 2. Press # and the display shows user nnn (first available user number).
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows user nnn - nnnn.
- 4. Press A or B until the display shows direct bypassing off/on (current setting).
- 5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing user codes, press # and the display shows regular user codes.
- 2. Press # and the display shows user nn (first available user number).
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows user nnn - nnnn.
- 4. Press B until the display shows remote access on/off (current setting).
- 5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing user codes, press # and the display shows regular user codes.
- 2. Press # and the display shows user nnn (first available user number).
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows user nnn - nnnn.
- 4. Press A or B until the display shows system tests off/on (current setting).
- 5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display shows REGULAR USER CODES.
- 2. Press # and the display shows USER nnn (first available user number).
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows USER nnn - nnnn.
- 4. Press A or B until the display shows LATCHKEY OFF/ON (current setting).
- 5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display shows REGULAR USER CODES.
- 2. Press # and the display shows USER nnn (first available user number).
- 3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows USER nnn - nnnn.
- 4. Press A or B until the display shows PARTITION ASSIGN (current setting).
- 5. Enter the desired partitions (1-6). The display flashes the entered numbers. Press # and the numbers stop flashing.
- Note You must be “in” the partition of the partition master code you wish to change.
- 1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # then A or B until the display shows PARTITION MASTER CODE.
- 2. Press # and the display shows PARTITION nnnn (current code).
- 3. Enter a new 4-digit code. The display flashes the entered code. Press # and the display shows the new code.
- 1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # then A or B until the display shows SYSTEM MASTER CODE.
- 2. Press # and the display shows SYSTEM MASTER nnnn (current code).
- 3. Enter a new 4-digit code. The display flashes the entered code. Press # and dis play shows the new code.
- Options Menu
- Note For this feature to work, the panel must be connected to a phone line and be programmed with REMOTE ACCESS on, with a Downloader phone number, and with a Downloader code.
- Note When this feature is on, the user does not need to press 5 (SILENT) before arming the system to prevent status sounds. When SIA False Alarm Reduction (0004) is ON, this option is not available.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
- 2. Press #, then A or B until the display shows SILENT ARMING OFF/ON (current setting).
- 3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
- 2. Press #, then A or B until the display shows TOUCHPAD BRIGHTNESS n (current setting).
- 3. Enter a setting from 0 (darkest background) to 3 (brightest background). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Note This menu appears only if a Phone Interface/Voice Module is connected to the panel.
- Note This menu appears only if a Phone Interface/Voice Module is connected to the panel.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
- 2. Press # then A or B until the display shows VOICE CHIME OFF/ ON (current setting).
- 3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
- 2. Press # then A or B until the display shows CHIME ON CLOSE OFF/ON (current setting).
- 3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- Set Up Schedules Menu
- Note If you are programming schedules for your customer, be sure to record the settings in the User’s Manual.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows SET UP SCHEDULES.
- 2. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00. If you want a differ ent schedule number, press A or B until the desired schedule num ber appears.
- 3. Press # and the display shows START TIME hh:mm (current setting).
- 4. Enter the desired starting time (00:00-23:59). The display flashes the entered time. Press # and the display shows START TIME hh:mm (new setting).
- 5. Press B and the display shows STOP TIME hh:mm (current setting).
- 6. Enter the desired stop time (00:00-23:59). The display flashes the entered time. Press # and the display shows STOP TIME hh:mm (new setting).
- 7. Press B and the display shows MONDAY OFF/ON (current setting). To select a different day, continue pressing B until the desired day appears.
- 8. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting for the selected day.
- 9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until all desired settings for each day are set.
- Attach Schedules to Events Menu
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
- 2. Press # then A or B until the display shows LATCHKEY OPENING OR LATCH KEY CLOSING.
- 3. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
- 4. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
- 2. Press # then A or B until the display shows EXCEPTION OPENING OR EXCEP TION CLOSING.
- 3. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
- 4. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
- 2. Press # then A or B until the display shows LIGHTS. Press # to enter the lights menu.
- 3. Press A or B until the desired light appears.
- 4. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
- 5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
- 6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 until all desired lights are attached to schedules.
- Note Outputs can only be scheduled if text has been entered in installer programming. Only onboard and SnapCard outputs can be scheduled.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
- 2. Press # then A or B until the display shows OUTPUTS. Press É to enter the outputs menu.
- 3. Press A or B until the desired output appears.
- 4. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
- 5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
- 6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 until all desired outputs are attached to schedules.
- Note This setting will allow you to arm to AWAY only. There is no disarm schedule.
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
- 2. Press # then A or B until the display shows ARMING.
- 3. To select arm to AWAY press #.
- 4. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
- 5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
- 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired schedules are attached.
- Energy Saver Menu
- Note The low setpoint cannot be set equal to or higher than the high setpoint.
- Note The high setpoint cannot be set equal to or lower than the low setpoint.
- Note The sensor must be learned into the current par tition before it can be attached.
- 1. With the display showing LIGHT 1 TO SENSOR y (current setting), press A or B to select the desired light number.
- 2. Enter the desired sensor number (01-96). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
- 3. Repeat steps 1 through 2 until all desired lights are attached to sensors.
- 1. With the display showing LIGHT 1 TO SENSOR y (current setting), press A or B to select the desired light number.
- 2. Enter 0 as the sensor number and press #.
- System Version Menu
- 1. Press A or B until the display shows SYSTEM VERSION.
- 2. Press # and the display shows FACTORY CODE nnn*nnnn.
- 3. Press B and the display shows SYSTEM NUMBER *nnnnnnn.
- 4. Press B again and the display shows SYSTEM LEVEL nnnn.
- 5. Press B again and the display shows SW VERSION nnnnx (panel firmware ver sion).
- Downloader Programming
- Note A Downloader Phone Num ber must be programmed and the user-programmable option “Downloading” must be on for remote downloader programming to work.
- Note Before testing, it is recom mended that you have cov ers on all modules (mounted outside the cabinet) and the panel cabinet door closed. The testing environment should match the system working environment.
- Note While the sensor test is a valuable installation and ser vice tool, it only tests sensor operation for the current conditions. You should per form a sensor test after any change in environment, equipment, or programming.
- 1. Place all sensors and zones in their non-alarm state.
- 2. At an alphanumeric touchpad, enter the sensor test mode by pressing 8 + installer code + 3. The touchpad sounds one beep and displays SENSOR TEST. The panel starts a 15 minute timer.
- 3. Trip each zone/sensor one at a time. Touchpads (and interior sirens) should sound one short, high-pitched beep and the display should show the sensor name (or number) and ok.
- 4. Press the status button when you think all zones/sensors are tested. The touchpad displays any untested sensors/zones and touchpad panics. If all sensors/zones and touchpad panics have been tested, the display shows SENSOR TEST OK.
- 5. Test any untested zones/sensors and touchpad panics.
- Note If you hear a long, low- pitched beep, proceed to the following section “If a Wire less Sensor Does Not Test.”
- 6. The system stays in sensor test mode for 15 minutes. When less than 5 minutes remain, touchpads and interior sirens beep and the panel announces the remaining time over the speakers once every minute. After 15 minutes the panel disarms to ...
- 7. When all sensors/zones and touchpad panics have been tested, press 1 + installer CODE to exit sensor test mode.
- If a Wireless Sensor Does Not Test
- Testing Phone Communication
- Testing Central Station/Pager Communication
- Note The way information is dis played varies with pager ser vices and may not match the example above. Account numbers with alpha-charac ters also vary when dis played, depending on pager service. Account numbers are not displayed if STREAML...
- 1. Call the central station and tell the operator that you will be testing the system.
- 2. Arm the system.
- 3. Test each of the touchpad and wireless panic buttons and trip at least one sensor of each type (fire, intrusion, etc.) to verify correct operation.
- 4. Check pager displays to verify reports are received. Pagers display an event code, digit sen sor number, and the last four digits of the account number. For example, a pager display of 999 002 7468 indicates the following: 999 = alarm cond...
- 5. When you finish testing the system, call the central monitoring station to verify that the alarms were received.
- Table 9: Pager System Event Codes
- Table 10: Pager Sensor/Zone Code and Numbers
- Testing Outputs and Sirens
- 1. Contact the central monitoring station to inform them you are testing the system.
- 2. Verify that all wiring at the panel and output devices is correct.
- 3. Activate the appropriate device to trigger each output as programmed.
- 4. Verify that each output responds according to the programmed configuration number. For outputs that trigger sirens, verify that the correct alarm sounds are produced from these sirens. Table 11 describes the system alarm sounds you should ...
- 5. Contact the central monitoring station when you are finished testing.
- Table 11: System Alarm Sounds
- Testing Light Control
- 1. Press 0 + 0 repeatedly to turn all lights on and off together.
- 2. Press 0 + 1 repeatedly to turn light 1 on and off.
- 3. Repeat step 2 for remaining lights (0 + 2 for light 2, 0 + 3 for light 3, etc.).
- 4. Arm the system to Away. All lights plugged into modules set to Unit 1 (or set as entry lights) should turn on and stay on for 5 minutes. All lights plugged into modules set to Unit 2 should blink three times to indicate the arming level. R...
- 5. Disarm the system. If Unit 1 (or entry) lights were on for an entry or alarm, they will turn off in 5 minutes. Unit 2 lights should blink once to indicate the system is off. Remaining lights should not be affected.
- 6. All lights should turn on and remain on during fire and auxiliary/medical alarms. All lights should flash during a police or intrusion alarm.
- Testing the Energy Saver Module (ESM)
- Note The system must have high- and low-temperature limits set to test the Energy Saver Module.
- Note There is a 5-minute delay after the Energy Saver Mod ule returns control to the fur nace/AC before it will override the furnace/AC again.
- Note Chime and trouble beep tones sound using the default frequency during, or within 15 seconds of, any button activity at that specific touchpad.
- Note Vacuum fluorescent displays do not have a contrast adjustment.
- 1. Enter configuration mode by pressing the d and 6 buttons together for at least two seconds. The display shows DA nnn.
- 2. Press and release the 1 and 2 buttons together repeatedly, until the desired contrast level is displayed.
- 3. Press * and the display briefly shows DONE, then shows the time and date.
- Testing Audio Verification Module (AVM) Communication
- 1. The off-site helper calls the panel, lets the phone ring twice, and hangs up.
- 2. The helper must call the panel again in 10 to 40 seconds. The panel answers System hello.
- 3. The helper dials the following on the phone, # 1234 # 8 (AVM access CODE) 5.
- 4. The helper should now be able to hear you through the AVM.
- 5. Walk through the vicinity of the AVM while speaking at a normal conversation level.
- 6. Tell the helper to dial a 1 and speak to you. To return to listen mode, the helper dials a 3.
- 7. When testing is complete, have the helper dial 99 and hang up.
- 1. Inform the central station that you will be sending an alarm and testing an AVM.
- 2. Give them the programming selections you made for the panel (see “Audio Verification Menu” for programming information).
- 3. Use a touchpad panic button to initiate an auxiliary alarm.
- 4. The central station operator waits for the alarm to be reported and initiates an audio session.
- 5. Walk through the vicinity of the AVM while speaking at a normal conversation level.
- 6. Have the operator speak to you.
- 7. When testing is complete, the operator will end the session.
- Testing Cellular Backup Communication
- Note If the current settings do not match the test settings, record the current settings (Table 12), so that they can be restored when this test is complete.
- 4. Disconnect the phone line by unplugging the Db-8 cord from the RL-31X Jack.
- 5. Initiate a phone test (8 + System Master Code + 2).
- 6. The phone test attempt should fail via the phone line within 5 minutes. The panel will emit a long low tone (and speak “phone failure 1” if so equipped).
- 7. Wait for the phone test to succeed via the cell backup. The panel should emit a short high tone (and speak “phone test ok” if so equipped).
- 8. Verify the CS report.
- 9. If success does not occur, verify that the signal strength (RSSI) shown on the Cellular Backup Module is acceptable and repeat steps 5-8.
- 10. Restore previous CS PHONE 1 settings if needed.
- Troubleshooting
- 1. Verify that the panel transformer is plugged into an unswitched outlet.
- 2. Check the AC circuit breaker to be sure the circuit is live.
- 3. Check that the backup battery is installed correctly and the AC power transformer is plugged in.
- 4. Check for proper panel and transformer wiring.
- 5. Measure the incoming AC voltage at panel terminals 1 and 2. It should read about 16.5 VAC.
- 1. Unplug the AC power transformer and disconnect the wires from the transformer and the panel.
- 1. Check that the backup battery is installed correctly and the AC power transformer is plugged in.
- 1. Check the AC circuit breaker to be sure the circuit is live.
- 1. Check your records to see if you have the customer’s access code(s) on file.
- 1. Check your records to see if you have the install code on file.
- 1. If arming to level 2, make sure all monitored perimeter doors and windows are closed.
- 1. Disarming using incorrect code. Enter correct code.
- 2. Access code is not programmed or set up in user programming to disarm system.
- 3. Wireless touchpad is not learned into system or hardwire touchpad is not communicating to panel. Check installer programming for learned wireless touchpads.
- 4. The installer code is being used to disarm the system. The system is designed not to disarm using the installer code. Use a regular or system master code to disarm the system.
- 1. Attempting to bypass a 24-hour sensor that cannot be bypassed (group 26 fire sensors).
- 1. Check that the premises phone line is working.
- 2. Perform a phone test.
- 3. Check that the DB-8 cord is plugged into the RJ-31X/CA-38A jack.
- 4. Check that the DB-8 cord is wired correctly to the panel.
- 5. Check for correct phone line wiring between the TELCO block and RJ-31X/CA-38A jack.
- 6. Replace faulty RJ-31X/CA-38A jack.
- 7. Replace faulty DB-8 cord.
- 8. Verify that central station/pager phone number is programmed into the panel. Reprogram the phone number and retest, if necessary.
- 9. Verify that the correct phone format (SIA or CID) is being used.
- 10. For pagers, extend the pager delay setting (see the PHONE OPTIONS-GLOBAL menu in the “Pro gramming” section.
- 1. Check that panel is powered up.
- 1. Check for touchpad power and/or bus miswiring, opens, or shorts.
- 1. Touchpad is not connected to panel bus terminals or is wired incorrectly. Check and correct wir ing.
- 1. Check that panel is powered up.
- 1. Check for touchpad power and/or bus miswiring, opens, or shorts.
- 1. Check for correct wiring at speaker and panel terminals; correct where necessary.
- 2. Speaker output has shut down because panel detected terminal 7 or 8 is shorted to ground. Disconnect panel AC and battery backup power. Locate short and correct. Apply panel AC and backup battery power and retest.
- 3. Alarm is in partition 2-6 and speaker is connected to panel terminals 7 and 8, which activate only for partition 1 alarms.
- 1. Check for incorrect wiring between siren and panel; correct where necessary.
- 1. System is disarmed. Arm system and then trip the zone.
- 2. Zone is not learned into panel memory. Enter installer/dealer program mode-LEARN SENSORS, and learn zone into memory.
- 3. Zone is learned into wrong partition. Delete zone and learn into correct partition or change the partition in the EDIT SENSORS menu.
- 4. For HIM zones, check that the HIM LED is blinking to verify communication with the panel. If LED is off, check wiring between HIM and panel.
- 1. Check that onboard, HIM, and SnapCard zone inputs have a 2k-ohm EOL resistor installed at the last device on the loop in series for N/C loops, in parallel for N/O loops.
- 1. Verify that receiver antennas are installed and connections are secure.
- 2. Check that the wireless sensor battery(s) are installed.
- 3. Check the sensor battery(s) for low voltage. Replace battery(s) if necessary.
- 4. Use an RF Sniffer (60-401) to verify that sensor is transmitting.
- 5. Sensor is not learned into panel memory. Enter installer/dealer program mode-LEARN SEN SORS, and learn sensor into memory.
- 6. Zone is learned into wrong partition. Delete zone and learn into correct partition or change the partition in the EDIT SENSORS menu.
- 1. Sensor tamper switch is tripped-sensor cover is off, not latched securely, or sensor is not mounted securely. Secure sensor mounting and/or cover, then trip sensor to clear the condi tion.
- 1. Use an RF Sniffer (60-401) to verify that sensor is transmitting. If sensor is not transmitting, check battery for low or no voltage and replace.
- 2. Change mounting position of sensor (from horizontal to vertical or vice versa) and test sensor several times for consistency.
- 3. Sensor signal is not reaching panel/receiver because sensor is too far away. Remove sensor from mounted location and test from other locations. Mount sensor in area where signal can reach panel/receiver or install a SuperBus 2000 RF Transc...
- 1. Verify that receiver antennas are installed and connections are secure.
- 2. Check that touchpad battery(s) are properly installed.
- 3. Check the touchpad battery(s) for low voltage. Replace battery(s), if necessary.
- 4. Use an RF Sniffer (60-401) to verify that touchpad is transmitting.
- 5. Touchpad is not learned into panel memory. Enter program mode and learn touchpad into memory (see LEARN SENSORS).
- 6. Touchpad is learned into wrong partition. Delete touchpad and learn into correct partition or change the partition in the EDIT SENSORS menu.
- 1. Wait 2 minutes and try again. The panel may be busy trying to report to the central station.
- 2. Disconnect the panel DB-8 cord from the RJ-31X jack. If the phone still doesn’t work, the sys tem is okay and the problem is in the wiring.
- 3. Check RJ-31X jack wiring and TELCO block wiring. Replace RJ-31X jack if necessary.
- 4. Check DB-8 cord connections at the panel and RJ-31X jack. Replace cord if necessary.
- 5. Perform a phone test after troubleshooting the phone line.
- 1. Check that the lamp has a working bulb and that the lamp switch is on.
- 2. Check to make sure X10 module is not plugged into an outlet controlled by a switch. Move to a nonswitched outlet location and test.
- 3. Panel is not powered by a power line carrier transformer. Replace existing transformer with a power line carrier transformer.
- 4. Power transformer and X10 modules are not plugged into outlets on the same electrical phase. Relocate modules or transformer to different outlets to determine working locations.
- 5. Check that the HOUSE dial on the X10 module matches the partition house code programmed into the panel.
- 6. X10 module is located in wrong partition. Move module to correct partition and retest.
- 7. Partition house codes are not programmed into panel. Enter program mode and set partition house codes.
- 1. Check that the module is wired correctly to the panel terminals.
- 1. Check that the module is wired correctly to the panel terminals.
- 1. Check that the RS-232 cable is firmly connected to the Automation Module and the Automation Device.
- 1. Verify the Cellular Backup option is on for the CS phone number being tested.
- 1. Check the antenna connection.
- 1. Check the antenna connection.
- 1. Check the antenna connection.
- 1. Check that the module is wired correctly to the panel terminals.
- 1. Wait 5 - 8 minutes for the module to communicate with alarm.com.
- 1. Check module’s status LED’s. Refer to the “SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway Module” instruc tions for a description of the LED’s.
- 1. Verify that the panel transformer is plugged into an unswitched outlet.
- Menu Charts.pdf
- Appendix C: Settings
- #}
- |’
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Demo Kit
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Partition 1 Copy
- Downloader Code
- 12345
- Account Number
- 00000
- Phone Number
- None
- Phone Number
- None
- Phone Number
- None
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Clear Memory
- Installer Code
- 4321
- Quick Arm
- On Off
- High Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- High Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- High Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Exit Programming
- Dealer Code
- * * * *
- Quick Exit
- On Off
- Low Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- Low Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- Low Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- #
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Access Code Lock
- On Off
- Exit Extension
- On Off
- Exception Rpts
- On Off
- Exception Rpts
- On Off
- Exception Rpts
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Ptn Security
- On Off
- Auto Stay Arming
- On Off
- Open/Close Rpts
- On Off
- Open/Close Rpts
- On Off
- Open/Close Rpts
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Multi Ptn Arm
- On Off
- Keyswitch Sensor
- On Off
- Backup
- On Off
- Backup
- On Off
- Backup
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Keychain TP Ptn
- Keyswitch Style
- Transition State
- Reporting Format
- SIA CID
- Reporting Format
- SIA CID
- Reporting Format
- SIA CID
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- SIA False Alarm
- On Off
- Duress Code
- * * * *
- Cellular Backup
- On Off
- Cellular Backup
- On Off
- Cellular Backup
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Phone Number
- None
- Phone Number
- None
- Phone Number
- None
- Phone Number
- None
- Phone Number
- None
- Phone Number
- None
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- High Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- High Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- High Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- High Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- High Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Low Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- Low Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- Low Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- Low Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- Low Lvl Rpts
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Exception Rpts
- On Off
- Exception Rpts
- On Off
- Exception Rpts
- On Off
- Exception Rpts
- On Off
- Exception Rpts
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Open/Close Rpts
- On Off
- Open/Close Rpts
- On Off
- Open/Close Rpts
- On Off
- Open/Close Rpts
- On Off
- Open/Close Rpts
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Latchkey Rpts
- On Off
- Latchkey Rpts
- On Off
- Latchkey Rpts
- On Off
- Latchkey Rpts
- On Off
- Latchkey Rpts
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Streamlining
- On Off
- Streamlining
- On Off
- Streamlining
- On Off
- Streamlining
- On Off
- Streamlining
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Ptn Assignment
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- Ptn Assignment
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- Ptn Assignment
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- Ptn Assignment
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- Ptn Assignment
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Phone Test
- On Off
- Local Phone Ctrl
- On Off
- Supervisory Time
- Entry Delay
- 30 sec (30-240)
- Entry Lights
- None (3-9)
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Auto Phone Test
- On Off
- Remote Access
- On Off
- RF Tx Timeout
- 12 hours (2-24)
- Exit Delay
- 60 sec (45-184)
- House Code
- 1B 2C 3D 4E 5F 6G
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Auto Test Reset
- On Off
- Ring/Hang/Ring
- On Off
- Phone Test Freq.
- 7 days (1-255)
- Extended Delay
- 4 min (1-8)
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Comm Failure
- On Off
- Line Fail Delay
- None (10-240 sec)
- Next Phone test
- 7 days (1-255)
- Siren Timeout
- 4 min (1-30)
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- DTMF Dialing
- On Off
- Toll Saver
- On Off
- Output Trip Time
- 4 sec (1-12)
- Sleep Time
- 22:00 (00:00-23:50)
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Dialer Abort
- On Off
- Phone Panic
- On Off
- Activity Timeout
- 24 hours (1-42)
- No Usage time
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Dial Abort Delay
- 30 sec (15-120)
- Phone ACC Key
- # ’
- Daylight Saving
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- Cancel Message
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- Pager Delay
- 15 sec (0-30)
- BÇ ÅA
- Call Wait Cancel
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- Dial Tone Detect
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Latchkey Zones
- None (1-96)
- Fire Panic
- On Off
- 24-Hour Tamper
- On Off
- Opening Reports
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Auxiliary Panic
- On Off
- Antenna Tamper
- On Off
- Closing Reports
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Police Panic
- On Off
- Buffer Control
- On Off
- Recent Closings
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Keychain TP Arm
- On Off
- Back In Service
- On Off
- No Activity
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Star is No Delay
- On Off
- Bypass Reports
- On Off
- Duress Option
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Low CPU Battery
- On Off
- Force Armed
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Battery Restoral
- On Off
- Latchkey Format
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Buffer Full Report
- On Off
- Freeze Alarm
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Zone Restorals
- On Off
- Freeze Temp
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Two Trip Error
- On Off
- Alarm Verify
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- TP Panic Rpt Fmt
- On Off
- System Tamper
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- AC Failure
- On Off
- Report Confirm
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- Receiver Failure
- On Off
- BÇ Å
- RF Low Bat Rpt
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- RF Supv Rpt
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- Swinger Limit
- 1 (1-2)
- B}
- |A
- Aux Power Fail
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Immediate Beeps
- On Off
- Siren Verify
- On Off
- Sensor Partition
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- Text for Sensor
- n
- Delete Sensor
- n
- Sn P1 Gnn
- NC/NO/TP
- RF/HW
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’A
- #Ç Å’
- Disable Trbl Beeps
- On Off
- Sensor Group
- 0
- Sensor n Item 0
- 0 -
- Delete Sensor n
- Done
- Sensor Partition
- n
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- UL 98 Options
- On Off
- Trip Sensor
- n
- Sensor Group
- n
- BÇ ÅA
- Global Fire
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- Silent Panic
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- B}
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Audio Verify
- On Off
- Unit - ID
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- Audio Mode
- 1
- B}
- |A
- Device ID
- nnnnn
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- Fire Shutdown
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- Partition Assign
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- Silent Talkback
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- Status Beeps
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- Key Beeps
- On Off
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- Access Timeout
- 90 sec (30-300)
- B}
- |A
- Freeze Temp
- 42˚ F (40˚-90˚ F)
- B}
- |A
- Temperature
- 40˚-90˚ F
- B}
- |A
- Temperature
- 40˚-90˚ F
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- Beep Delay
- 2 sec (0-300)
- B}
- |A
- Output n
- B}
- |A
- Partition Assign
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- B}
- |A
- Configuration
- * * * * *
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- Access Code
- * * * *
- B}
- |A
- Cellular System
- A B
- BÇ ÅA
- VOX Mic Gain
- 14 (01-64)
- BÇ ÅA
- VOX Gain Range
- 64 (01-64)
- BÇ ÅA
- Manual Mic Gain
- 04 (cannot change)
- BÇ ÅA
- VOX RX Gain
- 04 (01-10)
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- OUTPUT 1
- #}
- |’
- Partition Assign
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- B}
- |A
- Configuration
- 01400
- OUTPUT 1
- #}
- |’
- Output 1
- Item n
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- OUTPUT 2
- #}
- |’
- Partition Assign
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- B}
- |A
- Configuration
- 00410
- OUTPUT 2
- #}
- |’
- Output 2
- Item n
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- OUTPUT 3
- #}
- |’
- Partition Assign
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- B}
- |A
- Configuration
- 00903
- OUTPUT 3
- #}
- |’
- Output 3
- Item n
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- OUTPUT 4
- #}
- |’
- Partition Assign
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- B}
- |A
- Configuration
- 40˚-90˚ F
- OUTPUT 4
- #}
- |’
- Output 4
- Item n
- B}
- #Ç Å’
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Smoke Verify
- On Off
- B}
- |A
- B}
- |A
- BÇ ÅA
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- #Ç Å’
- Two-Wire Smoke
- On Off
- Partition Assign
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- Partition Assign
- 1 2 3 4 5 6
- Output 1
- Item n
- Output 2
- Item n
- BÇ ÅA
- BÇ ÅA
- Configuration
- 00410
- Configuration
- 00410
- Appendix D: Software Release Notes
- Specifications
- Appendix C: Settings
)
*(6HFXULW\
Installation Instructions
466-2182 PRELIMINARY
October 2004
Concord 4 Security Systems
(Software Version 4.0)
Part Numbers:
600-1021-95R
600-1022-95R
PRELIMINARY 10/18/04
Notices
FCC Part 15 Information to the User
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by GE Security can void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Part 15 Class B
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed
to provide reasonable protection against interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the affected equipment and the panel receiver to separate outlets, on different branch circuits.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
ACTA Part 68
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC Rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. Located on this equipment is a label that contains, among
other information, the registration number and the ringer equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided to the
telephone company.
Registration No. US:AAAEQ##TXXXX
The REN is used to determine the maximum number of devices that may be connected to your telephone line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in
devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most areas, the sum of all device RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of
devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company. For products approved after July 23, 2001, the
REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal
point (e.g., 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products, the REN is separately shown on the label.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and require-
ments as adopted by ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compliant modular
jack that is also compliant. See the Installation Instructions for details.
Alarm dialing equipment must be able to seize the telephone line and place a call in an emergency situation. It must be able to do this even if other equipment
(telephone, answering system, computer modem, etc.) already has the telephone line in use. To do so, alarm dialing equipment must be connected to a properly
installed RJ31X jack that is electrically in series and ahead of all other equipment attached to the same telephone line. Proper installation is depicted in the fol-
lowing diagram. If you have any questions concerning these instructions, consult your local telephone company or a qualified installer about installing an RJ31X
jack and alarm dialing equipment for you.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may temporarily disconnect your service. If possible, you will be notified in
advance. When advance notice is not practical, you will be notified as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. You will be
given advance notice in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, please contact the company that installed the equipment for service and/or repair information. The telephone com-
pany may ask you to disconnect this equipment from the network until the problem has been corrected or you are sure that the equipment is not malfunctioning.
This equipment may not be used on coin service provided by the telephone company. Connection to party lines is subject to state tariffs
Patent Information
This product and the use of this product may be covered by one or more of the following patents: 5,805,063, 5,872,512 5,942,981, 5,686,896, 5,686,885,
4,855,713. Except expressly provided herein, the purchase of this product shall not constitute a license or otherwise provide a right to practice a method covered
by any of the identified patents. GE Security hereby grants the purchaser of this product a limited, non-exclusive license to practice the methods patented in the
identified patents solely with products manufactured, sold or licensed by GE Security. This license grant does not extend to the use of unlicensed, third party
products with this product.
N e t w o r k
S e r v i c e
P r o v i d e r ' s
F a c i l i t i e s
Telephone
L i n e
N e t w o r k
D e m a r c a t i o n
P o i n t
Telephone
A n s w e r i n g
S y s t e m
F a x M a c h i n e
C o m p u t e r
Telephone
Telephone
A l a r m D i a l i n g
E q u i p m e n t
R J 3 1 X
J a c k
U n u s e d
R J - 1 1 J a c k
U n u s e d
R J - 1 1 J a c k
C u s t o m e r P r e m i s e s E q u i p m e n t a n d W i r i n g
1275 Red Fox Road, Arden Hills, MN 55112
Technical Support: 800-777-2624
©2003 GE Security. Concord is a trademark of GE Security. SuperBus is a registered trademark of GE Security. All other trademarks are prop-
erties of their owners. All rights reserved.
gGE Security
PRELIMINARY 10/18/04
Installation Instruction
s
Contents y i
Contents
About This Manual 1
About the User’s Guide ......................................................................................................................1
Special Installation Requirements .............................................................................................................. 1
UL Listed Installations ........................................................................................................................... 1
Basic System ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Household Burglary Alarm System Unit (UL 1023) ......................................................................... 1
Household Fire Warning System (UL 985) ........................................................................................ 2
UL 1023 & 985 24-Hour Backup ....................................................................................................... 2
SIA System Requirements ...................................................................................................................... 2
SIA Setting Requirements .................................................................................................................. 2
Commercial Burglary Alarm System Unit (Grade C UL 1610) ......................................................... 3
UL 1610 24-Hour Backup .................................................................................................................. 3
UL 1635 Digital Alarm Communicator System ................................................................................. 3
Central Station Reporting ....................................................................................................................... 4
UL Canada Listed Installations .............................................................................................................. 4
Canadian Standards CSA Certified Accessories ................................................................................ 4
Residential Burglary Alarm System Unit (ULC-S309) ...................................................................... 4
Residential Fire Warning System Control Unit (ULC-S545-M89) .................................................... 4
California State Fire Marshall Listed Installations 4
Planning the Installation 4
Standard Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 4
SuperBus 2000 Touchpads ......................................................................................................................... 5
SuperBus 2000 RF Transceiver .................................................................................................................. 5
Power Line Carrier Transformer ................................................................................................................ 5
SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice Module .......................................................................................... 5
SnapCards ................................................................................................................................................... 5
SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Module (HIM) .................................................................................................... 5
SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Module (HOM) ....................................................................................... 5
Interrogator 200 Audio Verification Module .............................................................................................. 5
SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module ................................................................................................... 5
SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module (ESM) ............................................................................................ 6
SuperBus 2000 Automation Module .......................................................................................................... 6
SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway-Ready Kit ............................................................................................ 6
SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply ........................................................................................................ 6
Dialog RF Electronic Thermostat ............................................................................................................... 6
Dialog RF Siren .......................................................................................................................................... 6
Dialog RF Iconized LCD Touchpad ........................................................................................................... 6
Installing the System 6
Determine the Panel Location .................................................................................................................... 7
Total System Power and Wire Length Guidelines ...................................................................................... 7
Power .................................................................................................................................................. 7
Wire Length ........................................................................................................................................ 7
Mounting the Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 9
Identify Panel Components 10
Installing Antenna Shrouds ...................................................................................................................... 10
Connecting the Panel to Earth Ground ..................................................................................................... 11
Installing Optional SnapCards .................................................................................................................. 11
Connecting Detection Devices to Panel Zone Inputs ............................................................................... 11
Connecting Intrusion Detection Devices .............................................................................................. 11
Connecting 2-Wire Smoke Detectors ................................................................................................... 12
Connecting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors.................................................................................................... 13
Connecting Speakers ................................................................................................................................ 13
15-Watt Speaker (13-060) .................................................................................................................... 13
ii Installation Instructions
Hardwire Interior Speaker (60-528) .....................................................................................................14
Connecting Exterior/Interior Piezo Sirens ................................................................................................14
Output 1 ................................................................................................................................................14
Piezo Dynamic Exterior Siren (13-950) ...........................................................................................14
Output 2 ................................................................................................................................................15
Hardwire Interior Siren (13-949) ......................................................................................................15
Connecting an Interrogator 200 Audio Verification Module (60-677) .....................................................15
Connecting SuperBus 2000 Touchpads ....................................................................................................16
Installing SuperBus 2000 Modules ...........................................................................................................16
Mounting Modules Inside the Panel Enclosure ....................................................................................16
SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply (600-1019) ...............................................................................17
SuperBus 2000 Transceiver Module (600-1025-95R) ..........................................................................17
SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice Module (60-777-01) ................................................................17
Power/Bus Wiring .............................................................................................................................17
Phone Line Wiring ............................................................................................................................18
Wiring for Status Voice Messages Only ...........................................................................................18
Wiring for Status and Alarm Messages ............................................................................................18
SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module (60-620-01) .............................................................................19
SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Module (60-774) ...........................................................................................19
SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Module (60-770) ................................................................................19
SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module .................................................................................................20
SuperBus 2000 Automation Module (60-783-02) ....................................................................................20
SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway-Ready Kit (600-1010)....................................................................... 21
Installing an RJ-31X Phone Jack (13-081) ...............................................................................................21
Connecting the Phone Line to the Panel with a DB-8 Cord .....................................................................21
Connecting the AC Power Transformer ................................................................................................... 22
Powering Up the Panel .............................................................................................................................23
Programming the Panel 23
Entering Program Mode ............................................................................................................................23
Touchpad Button Programming Functions ...............................................................................................24
Moving Through Program Mode Tiers and Menus ..................................................................................24
Programming Tier 1 Menu Items ..............................................................................................................25
Demo Kit Mode (System Programming)...........................................................................................25
Partition 1 Copy (System Programming) .........................................................................................25
Clear Memory (System Programming) ............................................................................................25
Programming Tier 2 Menu Items ..............................................................................................................26
Using Shortcut Numbers .......................................................................................................................26
Security Menu .......................................................................................................................................26
Partition Security ..................................................................................................................................27
Multi-Partition Arm/Disarm .................................................................................................................27
Keychain TP PTN .................................................................................................................................28
SIA False Alarm Reduction ..................................................................................................................28
Exit Extension .......................................................................................................................................29
Auto Stay Arming .................................................................................................................................30
Duress Code ..........................................................................................................................................31
Phones Menu .........................................................................................................................................31
Phone Options Menu ............................................................................................................................35
Dialer Abort ..........................................................................................................................................36
Dialer Abort Delay ................................................................................................................................37
Cancel Message ....................................................................................................................................37
Call Wait Cancel ...................................................................................................................................37
Timers Menu .........................................................................................................................................39
Entry Delay ...........................................................................................................................................41
Exit Delay .............................................................................................................................................41
Extended Delay .....................................................................................................................................41
Light Control Menu ..............................................................................................................................42
iii Installation Instructions
Touchpad Options Menu ...................................................................................................................... 43
Reporting Menu .................................................................................................................................... 44
Swinger Limit ....................................................................................................................................... 47
Alarm Verify ......................................................................................................................................... 49
Siren Options Menu .............................................................................................................................. 50
Sensors Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 51
Audio Verification Menu ...................................................................................................................... 54
Accessory Modules Menu .................................................................................................................... 56
Onboard Options Menu ........................................................................................................................ 59
Smoke Verify ........................................................................................................................................ 59
Macro Keys Menu ................................................................................................................................ 61
Exiting Programming Mode ..................................................................................................................... 62
Entering Quick Programming Mode ........................................................................................................ 62
Entering User Programming Mode .......................................................................................................... 62
Time and Date Menu ............................................................................................................................ 63
User Codes Menu ................................................................................................................................. 63
Options Menu .......................................................................................................................................65
Set Up Schedules Menu ........................................................................................................................ 66
Attach Schedules to Events Menu ........................................................................................................ 67
Energy Saver Menu .......................................................................................................................... 69
Attach Lights to Sensors Menu ............................................................................................................ 69
System Version Menu ........................................................................................................................... 70
Downloader Programming ....................................................................................................................... 70
Enterprise Downloader Programming .................................................................................................. 70
Testing the System 70
Basic System Commands ......................................................................................................................... 71
Testing Zones/Sensors .............................................................................................................................. 71
If a Wireless Sensor Does Not Test ...................................................................................................... 72
Testing Phone Communication ................................................................................................................. 72
Testing Central Station/Pager Communication ........................................................................................ 72
Testing Outputs and Sirens ....................................................................................................................... 73
Testing Light Control ............................................................................................................................... 74
Testing the Energy Saver Module (ESM) ................................................................................................. 74
Changing Fixed Display LCD Touchpad Chime and Trouble Beep Tones .............................................. 74
Adjusting Touchpad Display Contrast ...................................................................................................... 74
Testing Audio Verification Module (AVM) Communication ................................................................... 74
Testing Cellular Backup Communication ................................................................................................ 75
Troubleshooting 76
Appendix A: System Planning Worksheets 82
Appendix B: Reference Tables 90
Cross-Zoning ............................................................................................................................................ 91
Notes for Table B8: Response Numbers .......................................................................................... 98
Appendix C: Settings 100
Appendix D: Software Release Notes 106
Specifications 106
System Wiring Notes 108
System Wiring Diagram Back Page
Concord
1
About This
Manual
This manual provides information for planning, installing, programming, and testing this security
system. When necessary, this manual refers you to other documentation included with compati-
ble peripherals.
Planning sheets are included for you to record hardware layout and software programming set-
tings.
About the User’s Guide
The User’s Guide (466-2183) contains user worksheets that should be filled out during the instal-
lation and programming of the system. For multi-partition systems, a User’s Manual for each
partition is suggested.
Special Installation Requirements
This security system can be used as a fire warning system, an intrusion alarm system, an emer-
gency notification system, or any combination of the three.
Some installations may require configurations dictated by city/state codes, insurance, or Under-
writer’s Laboratories (UL). This section describes the various component and configuration list-
ings.
UL Listed Installations
This section describes the requirements for UL Listed installations.
Basic System
• Control Panel (600-1021-95R Concord 4 or 600-1022-95R Concord 4 Express)
• Standard Class II 16.5 VAC, 40 VA Power Transformer (600-1023) or Class II 16.5 VAC, 40
VA Line Carrier Power Transformer (600-1024)
• Backup Battery 12V 4 AH (60-681) or 12V 7 AH (60-680)
•SuperBus
® 2000 Fixed Display Touchpad (60-820), 2x16 LCD Touchpad (60-746-01),
ATP1000 (60-983) ATP2100 (60-985), ATP 2600 (60-984), 2x20 LCD Touchpad (60-803),
or 2x20 VFD Touchpad (60-804)
• Interior Speaker Siren (60-528), Interior Siren (13-949), Exterior Speaker Siren (13-060), or
Exterior Siren (13-950) per partition
Basic system may also include a SuperBus 2000 RF Transceiver (600-1025-95R).
Household Burglary Alarm System Unit (UL 1023)
Basic system, plus:
• Hardwire Magnetic Contact (13-068 or 13-071) or Wireless Learn Mode Door/Window Sen-
sor (60-362)
• Immediate Beeps set to on
• UL 98 Options set to on
• Receiver Failure set to on (if wireless devices are used)
• Siren Verify set to on
• Exit Delay set to 60 seconds
• Quick Exit set to off
• Siren Timeout set to 4 minutes or more
• Entry Delay set to 45 seconds or less
• RF TX Timeout set to 24 hours (if system includes a built in receiver or SuperBus 2000 RF
Transceiver and wireless smoke sensors)
• Extended Delay set to off
• Sleep Time set to off
• Two Trip Error set to off
• Alarm Verify set to off
• Disable Trouble Beeps set to off
Concord 2
Household Fire Warning System (UL 985)
Basic system, plus:
• Hardwire Smoke Detector: System Sensor models 2100D, 2100TD, 2100S, 2100TS, 2400,
or 2400TH learned into sensor group 26 or Sentrol (ESL) models 429AT, 521B or 521BXT
learned into sensor group 26
• Wireless Smoke Sensor 60-506-319.5 or 60-848-02-95 learned into sensor group 26
• Immediate Beeps set to on
• UL 98 Options set to on
• Receiver Failure set to on (if wireless devices are used)
• Siren Verify set to on
• RF TX Timeout set to 4 hours (if system includes a built in receiver or SuperBus 2000 RF
Transceiver and wireless smoke sensors)
• Sleep Time set to off
• Siren Timeout set to 4 minutes or more
• Two Trip Error set to off
• Disable Trouble Beeps set to off
UL 1023 & 985 24-Hour Backup
For 24-hour backup, the total current draw for all connected devices is limited to 90 mA (during
normal standby conditions) using a 4.0 AH battery, or 190 mA (during normal standby condi-
tions) using a 7.0 AH battery.
SIA System Requirements
Note
UL requirements take prior-
ity over SIA requirements.
SIA system requirements are the same as those described for a UL Listed Basic System on page
1, plus:
• If multiple annunciation is required, use Hardwire Siren part no.13-949.
SIA Setting Requirements
The following table describes programming requirements to meet ANSI-SIA CP-01.
Shortcut # Function Programming
Page
Reference
Testing
Page
Reference
Default
Setting
Required Setting
0004 SIA False Alarm
Reduction
28 71 On On
0013 - 0063 Exit Extension 29 71 On On
0014 - 0064 Auto Stay Arming 30 71 On On
0017 - 0067 Duress Code 31 71 Disabled Disabled
02006 Dialer Abort 36 71 On On
02007 Dialer Abort Delay 37 71 30 Sec. 15-45 sec.
02008 Cancel Message 37 71 On On
02010 Call Wait Cancel 37 71 Disabled On if reporting to central station and
customer has call waiting service
0310 - 0360 Entry Delay 41 71 30 sec. 30-240 sec.
0311 - 0361 Exit Delay 41 71 60 sec. 45-184 sec.
06015 Swinger Limit 47 71 1 1
1100 Smoke Verify 59 71 Off On if smoke alarms are programmed
into system
N/A Cross Zoning 91 71 Disabled Enabled for zones with a high
probability of false alarms
Concord
3
The following table describes non-programmable (hard coded) system operation as required to
meet ANSI-SIA CP-01 and is provided only for your reference.
Commercial Burglary Alarm System Unit (Grade C UL 1610)
Basic system using Control Panel 60-801-01 plus:
• Hardwire Magnetic Contact (13-068 or 13-071) or Wireless Learn Mode Door/Window
Sensor (60-499)
• SAW PIR Sensor (60-639-95R), Crystal PIR Sensor (60-703-95R), or DS924i PIR Sensor
(60-511-01-95)
• Immediate Beeps set to on
• UL 98 Options set to on
• Receiver Failure set to on (if wireless devices are used)
• RF TX Timeout set to 4 hours
• 24-Hour Tamper set to on
• System Tamper set to on
• Auto Phone Test set to on
• Phone Test Freq. set to 1
• Next Phone Test set to 1
• Siren Verify set to on
• AC Failure set to on
• Exit Delay set to 120 seconds or less
• Quick Exit set to off
• Two Trip Error set to off
• Alarm Verify set to off
• Disable Trouble Beeps set to off
• Phone Number must be programmed
• High Level Rpts set to on
• Low Level Rpts set to on
• Comm. Failure set to on
• Extended Delay set to off
• Sleep Time set to off
• Siren Timeout set to 4 minutes or more
UL 1610 24-Hour Backup
• Same as UL 1023 & 985
UL 1635 Digital Alarm Communicator System
Note
For UL 1635 installations,
Entry Delay plus Dialer
Abort Delay must not
exceed 60 seconds.
Same as UL 1023, 985 & 1610 plus:
• AC Failure set to on
• Phone Number must be programmed
• Low CPU Battery set to on
• Next Phone Test set to 1
• Phone Test Freq. set to 1
• High Level Rpts set to on
• Low Level Rpts set to on
• Comm. Failure set to on
• RF Tx Timeout set to 4 hours
Function Operation
Disarm During Entry Delay Enter Code Only (or 1 + CODE)
Cancel Alarm Enter Code Only (or 1 + CODE)
Abort Annunciation Enabled
Cancel Report Annunciation Enabled
Concord 4
Central Station Reporting
The panel has been tested with the following central station receivers using SIA and Contact ID
reporting formats:
• CS-5000 Central Station Receiver
• Sur-Gard Central Station Receiver with models SG-DRL2A and SG-CPM2
• Osborne Hoffman
UL Canada Listed Installations
This section describes the requirements for CUL (UL Canada) Listed installations.
Canadian Standards CSA Certified Accessories
Residential Burglary Alarm System Unit (ULC-S309)
Basic system as described for “UL 1023 Listed Installations” plus:
• Hardwire Magnetic Contact (13-068 or 13-071) or Wireless Learn Mode Door/Window Sen-
sor (60-362)
• Siren Timeout set to 5 minutes or more
Residential Fire Warning System Control Unit (ULC-S545-M89)
Basic system as described for “UL 985 Listed Installations” plus:
• Hardwire Smoke Detector: System Sensor models 2100D, 2100TD, 2100S, 2100TS, 2400,
2400TH learned into Sensor Group 26, or Sentrol (ESL) models 429AT, 521B, or 521BXT
learned into sensor group 26
• Wireless Smoke Sensor 60-506-319.5 or 60-848-02-95 learned into sensor group 26
• Immediate Trouble Beeps set to on
Note
For 24-hour backup, exter-
nal power drain is limited to
90 mA (during normal
standby condition) using a
4.0 AH battery, or 200 mA
continuous using a 7.0 AH
battery.
• RF TX Timeout set to 4 hours (if system includes SuperBus 2000 RF Transceiver and wire-
less smoke sensors)
California State Fire Marshall Listed Installations
Same as Household Fire Warning System (UL 985), plus:
• SMOKE VERIFY must be set to off
Planning the
Installation
This section describes system capabilities to help you get familiar with the system. “Appendix
A” provides planning sheets with tables that let you record the hardware and programming con-
figuration of the system. Fill in all necessary information ahead of time to help prepare for sys-
tem installation.
When planning the installation, keep in mind that the panel has the following capabilities (depen-
dent upon devices used):
• Up to 16 SuperBus 2000 Devices (maximum of 4 RF transceivers in addition to onboard
receiver)
• Up to 96 wireless or hardwired zones
Standard Panel
The following describe the basic panel (out-of-box) hardware capabilities.
•Power: Input for an AC step-down, plug-in style transformer.
•Auxiliary Power Output: Output that supplies 8.5 to 13.5 VDC with up to 1 amp for bus
devices and hardwired detectors, such as smoke and motion detectors.
•Bus A and B: Input and output that provides communication between bus devices and the
panel.
•Siren Driver: Output that can drive an 8-ohm load and provides intrusion and fire alarm
sounds for partition 1.
•2 Onboard Outputs: One 12 VDC source output and one open-collector output that can be
set up to activate other signalling devices, based on system events.
•Microphone Input: Input used for 2-way audio when used in conjunction with the Interro-
gator 200 Audio Verification Module.
•8 Supervised Hardwire Zones: Inputs for various hardwired detectors. Zone 8 can be set
up in programming to accept 2-wire smoke detectors.
Concord
5
•Built-In RF Receiver: Allows use of up to 96 or 32 319.5 MHz. crystal and/or SAW Learn
Mode wireless sensors and touchpads.
•Phone Line Connection: Allows panel to communicate with central monitoring station and/
or pagers.
SuperBus 2000 Touchpads
The following touchpads can be used for installer/user programming and system operation.
•SuperBus 2000 2x16 LCD Touchpad
•SuperBus 2000 2x20 LCD Touchpad
•SuperBus 2000 2x20 VFD Touchpad
• SuperBus 2000 ATP 1000 Touchpad
• SuperBus 2000 ATP 2100 Touchpad
• SuperBus 2000 ATP 2600 Touchpad
• SuperBus 2000 GTS 50
The following touchpads can be used only for installer quick programming, system operation and
user programming.
•SuperBus 2000 Fixed Display Touchpad
SuperBus 2000 RF Transceiver
The transceiver adds 2-way RF capability for use with compatible Dialog™ family devices and
expands system wireless zones to the maximum allowed by the panel. The transceiver is compat-
ible with all 319.5 MHz. crystal and SAW Learn Mode wireless sensors and touchpads.
Power Line Carrier Transformer
Using this transformer allows the use of X10 Powerhouse Lamp Modules for light control and
light activation during alarms.
SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice Module
This module allows system access and control using touch-tone telephones, on- or off-site. The
module includes an output for a speaker that sounds system status and alarm voice messages.
SnapCards
The following SnapCards expand the system as described:
•8Z Input SnapCard: Provides eight additional hardwire zone inputs, of which two are ded-
icated for using two wire smoke detectors.
•4 Output SnapCard: Provides four form C relay outputs that can be set up to activate other
signalling devices, based on system events, schedules, or direct control.
•4Z Input/2 Output Combo SnapCard: Provides three hardwire zone inputs, one two wire
smoke detector loop, and two outputs that can be set up to activate other signalling devices,
based on system events, schedules, or direct control.
SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Module (HIM)
Provides eight additional hardwire zone inputs.
SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Module (HOM)
Provides four form C relay outputs that can be set up to activate other signalling devices, based
on system events.
Interrogator 200 Audio Verification Module
Adding this module allows central station operators to listen-in and talk to occupants on the pre-
mises to verify the emergency when an alarm report is received.
SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module
Provides central station communication (cellular transmission) as a backup to regular phone
line(s).
Concord 6
SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module (ESM)
Provides a money-saving and convenient way to monitor and control temperatures. The ESM
uses low- and high-temperature limits to save energy by overriding the existing HVAC thermo-
stat.
SuperBus 2000 Automation Module
Provides a connection to a compatible home automation device.
SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway-Ready Kit
Allows users to control and monitor the status of their system from the alarm.com internet web-
site. Adding a modem to the module provides the link to a wireless 2-way paging network for
website access.
SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply
Provides an additional 12 VDC, 2 amps for powering system devices and is supervised via the
panel data bus.
Dialog RF Electronic Thermostat
Wireless alternative to the SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module. Use one or the other (Partition
1 only).
Dialog RF Siren
Wireless siren that works via RF signals (Partition 1 only).
Dialog RF Iconized LCD Touchpad
Wireless touchpad with LCD screen that display system status, controls the system, and includes
a built-in speaker for system messages (Partition 1 only).
Installing the
System
This section describes how to install the system control panel. Before starting the installation,
plan your system layout and programming using the worksheets provided in Appendix A.
Installing the system consists of the following:
• Determining the Panel Location
• Determining Total System Power and Wire Length Guidelines
• Mounting the Panel
• Identifying Panel Main Components
• Installing Optional SnapCards
• Connecting Detection Devices to Panel Zone Inputs
• Connecting Speakers
• Connecting Piezo Sirens
• Connecting an Interrogator 200 Audio Verification Module
• Connecting Alphanumeric and Fixed Display Touchpads
• Installing SuperBus 2000 Modules
• Installing an RJ-31X Phone Jack
• Connecting the Phone Line to the Panel with a DB-8 Cord
• Connecting the AC Power Transformer
• Powering Up the Panel
Concord
7
Note
(A) Class 2, Class 3, and
power-limited fire alarm cir-
cuits must be installed using
FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or substi-
tute cable permitted by the
National Electrical Code
ANSI/NFPA 70. Wire that
extends beyond the cable
jacket must be separated
from all other conductors by
a minimum of 1/4-inch or by
a nonconductive barrier.
OR
(B) Class 2, Class 3, and
power-limited fire alarm cir-
cuit conductors must be
installed as Class 1 or higher
circuits.
Determine the Panel Location
Before permanently mounting the panel, determine panel location using the following guidelines:
• Centrally locate the panel with relation to detection devices whenever possible, to help
reduce wire run lengths and labor.
• Locate the panel where the temperature will not exceed 120°F (49°C) or fall below 32°F
(0°C).
• Avoid running wires parallel with electrical wiring or fixtures such as fluorescent lighting, to
prevent wire runs from picking up electrical noise.
• Mount the panel at a comfortable working height (about 45 to 55 inches from the floor to the
bottom of the panel, as shown in Figure 1).
Figure 1. Determining Panel Location
• Leave space to the left and right of the panel for wiring, phone jack, and mounting optional
modules.
• Allow at least 9 inches above the panel cabinet for antennas.
• Allow at least 24 inches in front of the panel to open the panel door.
Total System Power and Wire Length Guidelines
Power
The panel can supply up to 1 amp (1,000 mA) for system devices connected to panel terminals 4
(+12V), 9 (OUT1), 11 (+12V), and 24 (2W SMK ZONE 8).
Wire Length
The total system wire length allowed can vary depending on devices powered by the panel, the
wire length between devices and the panel, and the combined wire length of all devices.
Table 1 describes the maximum wire length allowed between compatible devices and the panel,
and the minimum and maximum current draw of each device.
The minimum current draw of each device is based on the panel operating only from the backup
battery. For 24-hour backup, the total current draw of all SnapCards connected to the panel and
devices connected to +12V BUS (panel terminals 4 or 11) is limited to 90 mA (during normal
standby condition) using a 4.0 AH battery, or 200 mA (during normal standby condition) using a
7.0 AH battery
P A N E L
1 9 . 2 5 "
12"
14"
23"
45-55"
9 "
Antenna
Area
Phone Jack and
Optional Module
Mounting Area
FLOOR
Allow at least 24” in
front of the panel to open
cabinet door and access
panel components.
Concord 8
Table 1: Maximum Device Wire Length and MIn./Max. Current Draw
Device Max. Wire Length
to Panel
Min. mA
Draw
Max. mA
Draw
SuperBus 2000 2x16 LCD Alphanumeric Touchpad 22 ga.—300 ft.
18 ga.—750 ft. 15 mA 90 mA
SuperBus 2000 2x20 LCD Alphanumeric Touchpad 22 ga.—250 ft.
18 ga.—600 ft. 15 mA 120 mA
SuperBus 2000 2x20 VFD Alphanumeric Touchpad 22 ga.—250 ft.
18 ga.—600 ft. 15 mA 120 mA
SuperBus 2000 ATP 1000 Alphanumeric Touchpad 22 ga.—300 ft.
18 ga.—750 ft. 12 mA 110 mA
SuperBus 2000 ATP 2100 Alphanumeric Touchpad 22 ga.—300 ft.
18 ga.—750 ft. 30 mA 165 mA
SuperBus 2000 ATP 2600 Alphanumeric Touchpad 22 ga.—300 ft.
18 ga.—750 ft. 30 mA 165 mA
SuperBus 2000 GUI Touchpad 22 ga.—100 ft.
18 ga.—250 ft. 270 mA 300 mA
SuperBus 2000 Fixed Display Touchpad 22 ga.—300 ft.
18 ga.—700 ft. 11 mA 65 mA
SuperBus 2000 RF Transceiver 22 ga.—1,000 ft.
18 ga.—2,500 ft. 45 mA 55 mA
SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice Module 22 ga.—40 ft.
18 ga.—120 ft. 25 mA 600 mA
SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply no load no load
4 Input/2 Output SnapCard N/A 20 mA 185 mA*
8Z Hardwire Zone Expander SnapCard N/A 38 mA 230 mA*
4 Output SnapCard N/A 1 mA 130 mA*
SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Module 22 ga.—1,800 ft.
18 ga.—4,000 ft. 18 mA 35 mA
SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Module 22 ga.—350 ft.
18 ga.—900 ft. 12 mA 180 mA
SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module 22 ga.—1,600 ft.
18 ga.—4,000 ft. 20 mA 20 mA
SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module
Standard Power:
22 ga.—15 ft.
18 ga.—40 ft.
90 mA 1600 mA
High Power
22 ga.—10 ft.
18 ga.—30 ft.
90 mA 1900 mA
SuperBus 2000 Automation Module 22 ga.—1,500 ft.
18 ga.—4,000 ft. 30 mA 35 mA
SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway-Ready Kit 22 ga.—40 ft.
18 ga.—90 ft. 55 mA 1600 mA
Interrogator 200 22 ga.—3,200 ft.
18 ga.—4,500 ft. 10 mA 10 mA
Interrogator AVM 22 ga.—110 ft.
18 ga.—260 ft. 45 mA 300 mA
*Maximum current draw for the SnapCards does not include the load which may be
applied to their auxiliary DC supply.
Concord
9
Table 2 describes the total system wire lengths allowed for all SuperBus 2000 devices when
installing systems using unshielded or shielded cable. (The maximum wire length for individual
devices is shown in Table 1)
After determining panel location, run all necessary wires to that location using the guidelines in
Table 3.
Mounting the Panel
Use the following procedure to mount the panel to the wall or wall studs.
Make sure you are free of static electricity whenever you work on the panel with the cover
open. To discharge any static, first touch the metal panel chassis, then stay in contact with
the chassis when touching the circuit board. Using an approved grounding strap is recom-
mended.
¾To mount the panel (see Figure 2):
1. Remove the panel door and remove the necessary wiring knockouts. Be careful not to dam-
age the circuit board.
2. Feed all wires through wiring knockouts and place the panel in position against the wall.
3. Level the panel and mark the top and bottom mounting holes.
4. Install anchors where studs are not present.
5. Partially insert screws into the two top mounting hole locations, then hang the panel on the
two screws.
Table 2: Total System Wire Length Allowed
Wire Type Total System Wire
18-gauge, unshielded
18-gauge, shielded
4,000 ft.
3,000 ft.
22-gauge, unshielded
22-gauge, shielded
4,000 ft.
3,000 ft.
Table 3: Wire Requirements
Device Wire Requirements
AC Power Transformer 2-conductor, 18-gauge, 25 feet max
Earth Ground Single conductor, 16-gauge solid, 25 feet max
Telephone (RJ-31X) 4-conductor
Detection Devices
2- or 4-conductor, 22-gauge, 1,000 feet max
2- or 4-conductor, 18-gauge, 2,500 feet max
(based on 30 ohms max loop resistance includ-
ing device)
Speakers 2-conductor, 18-gauge, 100 feet max
SuperBus 2000 Devices 4-conductor, 22- or 18-gauge (see Table 1)
Interrogator 200 AVM Power and Microphone 4-conductor, 22-gauge, shielded (see Table 1)
2-Wire Smoke Detectors
2-conductor, 22-gauge, 330 feet max
2-conductor, 18-gauge, 830 feet max
(based on 10-ohms max loop resistance plus a
2k-ohm, end-of-line resistor)
Caution
!
Concord 10
6. Recheck for level, insert the two lower screws, and tighten all four mounting screws.
Figure 2. Mounting the Panel
Identify Panel
Components
Before installing devices and making wiring connections, familiarize yourself with the main
panel components. Figure 3 shows the main component locations.
Figure 3. Circuit Board Main Components
Installing Antenna Shrouds
Install a plastic antenna shroud (included with panel) over each antenna and snap them into the
holes on top of the enclosure (see Figure 4).
Figure 4. Installing Antenna Shrouds
+
_
Mounting
Holes
Mounting
Holes
+
_
B L K
R E D
Programming
Touchpad
Header
Antennas
Microprocessor
Terminal Strip
EEPROM
SnapCard
Header
Backup Battery
Connections
Concord
11
Note
For best results, it is recom-
mended that you crimp a
spade lug on the wire end at
the panel and secure the lug
to the enclosure as shown in
Figure 5.
Connecting the Panel to Earth Ground
For maximum protection from lightning strikes and transients, connect the enclosure to earth
ground as shown in Figure 5. Use 16-gauge, solid copper wire from an earth grounded cold water
pipe clamp to the enclosure.
Figure 5. Connecting the Panel to Earth Ground
Installing Optional SnapCards
The SnapCard Header on the right side of the panel allows for the installation of one SnapCard.
Install the desired SnapCard onto the panel SnapCard Header and secure it in place with two
screws, included with the card (see Figure 6).
Connect all necessary input/output wiring using the Installation Instructions included with the
card.
Figure 6. Installing a SnapCard
Note
The panel comes with fac-
tory programmed onboard
hardwire zones. Install
2k-ohm, end of line (EOL)
resistors on all unused fac-
tory programmed onboard
hardwire zones. If you don’t
want to install EOL resistors,
delete any unused zones
from memory. See Table 7
for onboard hardwire zone
factory programming.
Connecting Detection Devices to Panel Zone Inputs
Zone inputs 1 through 8 are supervised using included 2k-ohm, end-of-line resistors at the last
device on each circuit. All eight zones accept either normally open (N/O) or normally closed (N/
C) detection devices.
Connecting Intrusion Detection Devices
Figure 7 shows the typical wiring for N/C and N/O door/window intrusion detection and the typ-
ical wiring for a Detection Systems model DS922 (part no. 13-082) motion detector. The mini-
mum available panel voltage for hardwired PIR motion detectors is 8.5 VDC (9.5 VDC for UL
listed installations).
Note
When using 2-wire smoke detectors on zone 8, the Two-Wire Smoke setting (in program mode) must be
turned on before entering the LEARN SENSORS menu. See ONBOARD OPTIONS—INPUTS in the section
“Programming the Panel” for complete details.
+
_
To Water Pipe
Pipe
Ground Clamp
+
_
Screw Locations
SnapCard
Header
Connector
SnapCard
Concord 12
Figure 7. Connecting N/C and N/O Intrusion Detection and Motion Detector Circuits to the Panel
Connecting 2-Wire Smoke Detectors
Zone input 8 can be set up (in program mode) to accept the following 12 VDC, 2-wire smoke
detectors:
•System Sensor models 2100D, 2100TD, 2100S, 2100TS, 2400, 2400TH
•ESL models 429AT, 521B, 521BXT—(models 521B and 521BXT require the following dip
switch settings: 1-on, 2-off)
When set up for 2-wire smoke detectors, zone 8 can handle up to 20 smoke detectors with
120 uA maximum idle current per detector. Maximum total loop current allowed in an alarm con-
dition is 100 mA. Connect one or more, 2-wire smoke detectors to the panel as shown in Figure
9.
Note
The Two-Wire Smoke set-
ting (in program mode) must
be off when using 4-wire
smoke detectors. See
ONBOARD OPTIONS—INPUTS
in the section “Programming
the Panel” for complete
details.
Figure 8. Connecting 2 and 4-Wire Smoke Detectors to the Panel
Panel Terminals
2k Ohm EOL
Resistor 49-454
1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7
G N D Z O N E 1 Z O N E 3
Z O N E 2 G N D
2k Ohm EOL
Resistor 49-454
Normally
Closed
(N/C)
Contacts
In Series Normally
Open (N/O)
Contacts in
Parallel
L P
-
+L N
1 9 2 0
G N D Z O N E 5
1 1
+ 1 2 V
Motion
Detector
2k Ohm EOL Resistor 49-454
(Locate at Sensor)
Use only the 2-wire smoke detector models described above. Alarm signals from other
detectors may not be processed correctly if the panel has lost AC power and is operating
only from the backup battery.
Caution
!
2k Ohm EOL
(Locate at Last Detector)
Resistor 49-454
2-Wire 4-Wire
2 2
G N D
2 3 2 4
Z O N E 7
2 W S M K
Z O N E 8
+
C
O
M
. . . . . . . .
+- -
C
O
M
N
O
N
O
+
C
O
M
. . . . . . . .
+--
C
O
M
N
O
N
O
2 2
G N D
2 3 2 4
Z O N E 7
2 W S M K
Z O N E 8
+
-
+
-
Model
449AT
2k Ohm EOL
(Locate at Last Detector)
Resistor 49-454
Concord
13
Connecting 4-Wire Smoke Detectors
Zone input 8 can be used with 4-wire smoke detectors that latch and remain in the alarm state
until power is removed, then restored to the detector. The panel provides this power interruption
from terminal 24 (2W SMK ZONE 8) only when zone 8 is learned into sensor group 26 (fire) and
the Two-Wire Smoke option is on.
Note
Zone 8 must be learned into
sensor group 26 (fire) for
connected smoke detectors
to reset after canceling a fire
alarm.
Table 4 describes the minimum available panel power. Use only 4-wire smoke detectors that
operate at these power limits. Connect up to five Sentrol (ESL) model 449AT (part no. 13-360)
smoke detectors to panel power and zone 8 input as shown in Figure 8.
Connecting Speakers
Note
Install all sirens/speakers
indoors, in a concealed loca-
tion.
The panel provides one siren driver output for intrusion (steady), fire (temporal 3), and auxiliary
(on-off-on-off) alarm sounds. This output trips only for partition 1 alarms.
The output can drive a single 8-ohm speaker or multiple speaker circuit of 8-ohms or higher (as
shown in the following speaker wiring diagrams). Compatible speakers are described below.
15-Watt Speaker (13-060)
For exterior siren applications, connect the speaker to the panel using 18-gauge wire as shown in
Figure 9.
Figure 9. Connecting Exterior Speakers to the Panel
Table 4: Panel Minimum Available Power
Min. Voltage/Max. Current Available
8.3 VDC, up to 30 mA total (combined alarm) current
8.1 VDC, up to 40 mA total (combined alarm) current
7.6 VDC, up to 60 mA total (combined alarm) current
7.1 VDC, up to 80 mA total (combined alarm) current
Caution
!
To avoid disabling the panel speaker output, do not make speaker connections with the
panel powered up.
Splice
Speaker Speaker
2 8-Ohm Speakers in
Series (16 Ohms)
7788
Concord 14
Hardwire Interior Speaker (60-528)
Connect interior speakers to the panel using 18-gauge wire as shown in Figure 10.
Figure 10. Connecting Hardwire Interior Speakers
Connecting Exterior/Interior Piezo Sirens
Output 1
Onboard output 1 (OUT 1—terminal 9) is a 12 VDC switched, programmable output that can
handle a maximum of 1,000 mA current. The default setting (01614) activates the output 30 sec-
onds after a police or fire alarm condition occurs. This allows you to connect a piezo siren with-
out changing the output configuration number in programming. This output is typically used for
exterior siren applications. (For more information on output configuration numbers, see
“Onboard Options Menu”.)
Piezo Dynamic Exterior Siren (13-950)
Note
This siren is not UL approved for use as an outdoor sounding device.
Connect the siren to panel as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 11. Connecting Exterior Sirens
Connect only the large speaker to the panel terminals 7 and 8 as shown. The smaller
speaker cannot handle to output of terminals 7 and 8. To avoid damaging the speaker, the
smaller speaker should not be connected to terminals 7 and 8.
Caution
!
87
Speaker
Not Used
Panel
Terminals
Not Used
Not Used
Speaker
Panel
Terminals 78
9
O U T 1
1 3
G N D
Red
Panel
Termi nals
Black
Concord
15
Output 2
Onboard output 2 (OUT 2—terminal 10) is an open-collector (switched path-to-ground), pro-
grammable output that can handle a maximum of 300 mA current sink. The default setting
(01710) activates the output for status and alarm tones, allowing for a piezo siren connection
without changing the output configuration number. This output is typically used for interior siren
applications. (For more information on output configuration numbers, see “Onboard Options
Menu”.)
Hardwire Interior Siren (13-949)
This siren has two inputs; steady (#1) and warble (#2). Use the steady (#1) terminal for Concord
4 panels. The siren also includes a cover tamper switch that can be connected to a hardwire zone
input on the panel, SnapCard or SuperBus 2000 Hardwire Input Module. Connect the siren to the
panel/zone input terminals as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 12. Connecting Exterior and Interior Sirens
Connecting an Interrogator 200 Audio Verification Module (60-677)
Connect the Interrogator 200 Audio Verification Module (AVM) to the panel terminals as shown
in Figure 12. Partition 1 use only.
Figure 13. Connecting an Interrogator 200 AVM
S W S W G N D # 1 # 2
1 0
O U T 2
1 1
+ 1 2 V
Panel
2k Ohm
Resistor
49-454
Terminals
To Zone Input
If a speaker is already connected to panel terminals 7 and 8, the Interrogator 200
speaker must be hooked up in series with that speaker to provide a 16-ohm load. Hook-
ing up speakers in parallel to panel terminals 7 and 8 creates a 4-ohm load that can
cause permanent damage to the panel.
Caution
!
7 8
SPEAKER
1 3 1 1
G N D + 1 2 V
1 2
M I C
Panel Terminals
Yellow
Splice
Cable Shield
Speaker
Microphone
Cable
Cable
Concord 16
Connecting SuperBus 2000 Touchpads
SuperBus 2000 touchpads may have wires or screw terminals. All use the same wiring scheme
for power and bus connections. Connect touchpads to the as shown in Figure 13.
Figure 14. Connecting Touchpads to the Panel
Installing SuperBus 2000 Modules
SuperBus 2000 modules can be installed inside the panel cabinet or away from the panel with
their included enclosure.
Mounting Modules Inside the Panel Enclosure
Use the following guidelines when mounting modules inside the panel enclosure (see Figure 14):
• Up to 4 of the SuperBus 2000 modules listed in Table 1 can be mounted inside the cabinet.
• The 2 Amp Power Supply and Phone Interface/Voice Module each use two mounting spaces
when mounted inside the panel enclosure.
• The panel includes two support standoffs you install to secure module backplates to the
panel.
Note
Even if you don’t plan to
mount modules inside the
cabinet, install the support
standoffs for future use and
to avoid losing them.
• Install the standoffs at the locations shown.
• The cabinet has built-in mounting clips on the top and sides that module backplates slide
onto for mounting.
Figure 15. Installing SuperBus 2000 Modules
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V A B U S B
G N D
3456
+ 1 2 V AB
G N D B U S
+ 1 2 V ABG N D /
C O M
Touchpads
+12V—Red
Bus A—Green
Bus B—White or Yellow
GND—Black
Panel
Te r mi n a l s
with Wires
Touchpads
with Terminals
Support
Standoffs
Top
Mounting
Clips (6) Side
Mounting
Clip
Screws
Concord
17
SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply (600-1019)
Note
Do not connect power (AC
and battery) to the power
supply until the panel is
ready for power up. For
power supply AC and bat-
tery connections, see the
SuperBus 2000 2 Amp
Power Supply Installation
Instructions.
Connect the power supply to the panel terminals and devices to be powered as shown in Figure
16.
Figure 16. Wiring the SuperBus 2 Amp Power Supply to the Panel
SuperBus 2000 Transceiver Module (600-1025-95R)
The transceiver expands system capabilities as follows:
• adds wireless capability to Hardwire Concord 4 panels.
• expands RF reception range when placed in the vicinity of sensors on the fringe of panel RF
reception.
• adds Dialog 2-way RF device compatibility in systems with Hardwire Concord 4 or RF Con-
cord 4 panels.
Connect the transceiver (up to four) to the panel as shown in Figure 17.
Figure 17. Wiring the SuperBus 2000 RF Transceiver
SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice Module (60-777-01)
The Phone Interface/Voice Module includes two backplates for mounting the module inside the
control panel cabinet. The module can also be mounted outside of the control panel using an
optional plastic housing (part no. 60-800). Refer to the SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice
Module Installation Instructions included with each module, for complete mounting instructions.
Note
In UL Listed installations, the
Phone Interface/Voice Mod-
ule is for supplementary use
only.
The module requires panel power and bus connections, phone line connection through panel ter-
minals and DB-8 cord (from an RJ-31X jack), and speaker connection through panel terminals.
Power/Bus Wiring
Connect the module to the panel power and bus terminals as shown in Figure 18.
Figure 18. Power and Bus Wiring for the Phone Interface/Voice Module
2 4 V A C 2 4 V A C + 1 2 V B U S A B U S B G N D + 1 2 V
O U T
Z O N EG N D G N D
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V AB
G N D B U S
N O C O N N E C T I O N
Panel
Terminals
Power Supply
Terminals
To power inputs
on devices
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V AB
G N D B U S
+ 1 2 V ABG N D
Panel
Terminals
Transceiver
Ter minals
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V A B U S B
G N D
1
+ 1 2 V
2
A
3
B
4
G N D
5
G N D
6
SPK1
7
S P K 2
8
A U D 1
9
A U D 2
1 0
G N D
1 1
T I P 1
1 2
T I P 2
1 3
R I N G
2
1 4
R I N G
1
Panel Terminals
Phone Interface/Voice
Module Terminals
Concord 18
Note
For RJ-31X connections,
see “Installing an RJ-31X
Phone Jack (13-081).
Phone Line Wiring
For partition 1, connect the phone line to the module through the panel terminals and DB-8 cord
(from an RJ-31X jack) as shown in Figure 19. For partitions 2-6 phone connections, see the
SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice Module Installation Instructions.
Figure 19. Phone Line Wiring for the Phone Interface/Voice Module
Note
To prevent status voice mes-
sages from being broadcast
outside, do not connect
exterior speakers to Phone
Interface/Voice module ter-
minals 6 and 7.
Wiring for Status Voice Messages Only
Connect an interior speaker to the Phone Interface/Voice Module terminals as shown under “Sta-
tus” in Figure 20. When connected as shown, the speaker only produces status voice messages.
In an alarm situation the speaker announces voice status messages.
Wiring for Status and Alarm Messages
Make the connection shown under “Status and Alarm” in Figure 20 only if the Phone Interface/
Voice Module is being installed in Partition 1 and alarm sounds are desired. In an alarm situation,
the speaker alternates between alarm siren tones and voice status messages.
Figure 20. Wiring the Phone Interface/Voice Module for Status Only or Status and
Alarm Messages
1
+ 1 2 V
2
A
3
B
4
G N D
5
G N D
6
S P K 1
7
SPK2
8
A U D 1
9
A U D 2
1 0
G N D
1 1
T I P 1
1 2
T I P 2
1 3
R I N G
2
1 4
R I N G
1
2 5
G R N
2 6 2 7 2 8
B R N G R Y R E D
Phone Interface/Voice Module Terminals
Panel Terminals
RJ-31X Jack
Grn Red
Brn Gry
DB-8 Cord
Green
Red
Brown
Gray
1
+ 1 2 V
2
A
3
B
4
G N D
5
G N D
6
SPK1
7
S P K 2
8
A U D 1
9
A U D 2
1 0
G N D
1 1
T I P 1
1 2
T I P 2
1 3
R I N G
2
1 4
R I N G
1
7 8
SPEAKER
1
+ 1 2 V
2
A
3
B
4
G N D
5
G N D
6
SPK1
7
SPK2
8
A U D 1
9
A U D 2
1 0
G N D
1 1
T I P 1
1 2
T I P 2
1 3
R I N G
2
1 4
R I N G
1
Phone Interface/Voice Module Terminals
Hardwire Interior
Speaker (60-528)
Not Used Not Used
Phone Interface/Voice Module Terminals
Panel
Terminals
Status Status and Alarm
Concord
19
SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module (60-620-01)
Connect the Energy Saver Module to the panel and premises thermostat as shown in Figure 21.
Figure 21. Wiring the Energy Saver Module to the Panel
SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Module (60-774)
Connect the SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Module to the panel as shown in Figure 22.
Connect all necessary input wiring using the Installation Instructions included with the module.
SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Module (60-770)
Connect the SuperBus 2000 4-Relay Output Module to the panel as shown in Figure 22.
Connect all necessary output wiring using the Installation Instructions included with the module.
Figure 22. Wiring Input and Output Modules to the Panel
12 3 4 5 6
H E A T
O F F
A / C
5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V A B U S B
G N D
Panel
Terminals
Thermostat Energy Saver Module
To HVAC
Input Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6
Z O N E C O M M O N
Z O N E 1
Z O N E 2
Z O N E 3
Z O N E 4
Z O N E 5
Z O N E C O M M O N
Z O N E C O M M O N
Z O N E 6
Z O N E 7
Z O N E C O M M O N
Z O N E 8
I D : X X X X X X X X
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V A B U S B
G N D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7
N O 1
N C 1
C O M 1
1 8
Z O N E 1
N O 2
N C 2
C O M 2
N O 3
N C 3
C O M 3
N O 4
N C 4
C O M 4
Z O N E C O M
I D : X X X X X X X X
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V A B U S B
G N D
Concord 20
SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module
Connect the SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module to the SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Sup-
ply and panel as shown in Figure 23.
Figure 23. Wiring the Cellular Backup Module to the Panel
SuperBus 2000 Automation Module (60-783-02)
Connect the SuperBus 2000 Automation Module to the panel as shown in Figure 24.
Figure 24. Connecting the SuperBus to the Panel
Caution
!
Since the SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module draws more than 1 amp, it must be
powered by the SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply and not the panel.
1 2 3 4 5 6
Z C O M
Z O N E 1
2 4 V A C 2 4 V A C + 1 2 V B U S A B U S B G N D + 1 2 V
O U T
Z O N EG N D G N D
SuperBus 2000
2 Amp Power
Supply Terminals
1 2 3 4 5 6
Z C O M
Z O N E 1
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V A B U S B
G N D
Panel
Terminals
Automation
Device
Automation Module Circuit Board DB-9 Serial Cable
Concord
21
SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway-Ready Kit (600-1010)
Connect the SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway Module to the SuperBus 2000 terminals as shown
in Figure 25.
Figure 25. Connecting the Wireless Gateway Module to the Panel
Note
The panel cannot be used
on a digital or PBX phone
line. These systems are
designed for digital type
devices only, operating any-
where from 5 volts DC and
up. The panel uses an ana-
log modem and does not
have a digital converter,
adapter, or interface to oper-
ate through such systems.
Installing an RJ-31X Phone Jack (13-081)
Use the following guidelines when installing an RJ-31X phone jack for system control by phone
and central station monitoring.
• Locate the RJ-31X jack (CA-38A in Canada) no further than five feet from the panel.
• The panel must be connected to a standard analog (loop-start) phone line, that provides 48
volts DC (on-hook or idle).
• For full line seizure, install an RJ-31X phone jack on the premises phone line so the panel is
ahead of all phones and other devices on the line. This allows the panel to take control of the
phone line when an alarm occurs, even if the phone is in use or off-hook.
Note
Connecting the panel to an
analog line off the phone
switch places the panel
ahead of the phone system,
preventing panel access
from phones on the pre-
mises. However, the panel
can still be accessed from
off-site phones.
• If an analog line is not available, contact a telecommunications specialist and request an ana-
log line off the phone switch (PBX mainframe) or a 1FB (standard business line).
¾To connect a phone line to the panel using an RJ-31X/CA-38A jack:
1. Run a 4-conductor cable from the TELCO protector block to the jack location (see A in Fig-
ure 26).
2. Connect one end of the cable to the jack (see B in Figure 26).
3. At the TELCO protector block, remove the premises phone lines from the block and splice
them to the black and white (or yellow) wires of the 4-conductor cable (see C in Figure 26).
4. Connect the green and red wires from the 4-conductor cable to the TIP (+) and RING (-)
posts on the block (see D in Figure 26).
5. Check the phones on the premises for dial tone and the ability to dial out and make phone
calls. If phones do not work correctly, check all wiring and correct where necessary. Proceed
to the “Troubleshooting” section of this manual if problems persist.
Connecting the Phone Line to the Panel with a DB-8 Cord
After installing the RJ-31X jack, you are ready to connect the phone line to the panel. A DB-8
cord (not included) uses a plug at one end for connecting to the RJ-31X module and flying leads
on the other end for panel terminal connections.
¾To connect the DB-8 cord to the panel terminals and RJ-31X jack (see Figure 26):
1. Connect the green, brown, gray, and red flying leads from the DB-8 cord to panel terminals
24, 25, 26, and 27.
2. Insert the DB-8 cord’s plug into the RJ-31X.
3. Check the phones on the premises for dial tone and the ability to dial out and make phone
calls. If phones do not work correctly, check all wiring and correct where necessary. Proceed
to the “Troubleshooting” section of this manual if problems persist.
Caution
!
Since the SuperBus Wireless Gateway-Ready Kit draws more than 1 amp, it must be
powered by the SuperBus 2000 2 Amp Power Supply and not the panel.
+ 1 2 V A B G N D Z 1 Z C O M
2 4 V A C 2 4 V A C + 1 2 V B U S A B U S B G N D + 1 2 V
O U T
Z O N EG N D G N D
SuperBus 2000
2 Amp Power
Supply Terminals
Concord 22
Figure 26. Wiring an RJ-31X Jack and DB-8 Cord to the Panel
Connecting the AC Power Transformer
The panel must be powered by a plug-in stepdown transformer that supplies 16.5 VAC, 40 VA
(600-1023).
For systems that include X10 Lamp Modules, the panel must be powered with the Line Carrier
Power Transformer that supplies 16.5 VAC, 40 VA (600-1024). Connect the power transformer
to the panel as shown in Figure 27.
Figure 27. Connecting Panel Power Transformer and Backup Battery
Brn Gry
RJ-31X
Jack Red
Grn
TELCO
Protector Block
Green Red
Lines from Phones
on Premises
Dealer
Cable
Run
TIP
(+)
RING
(-)
Black
White
(or Yellow)
Red
Green
Black White
(or Yellow)
Green Red
2 5
G R N
2 6 2 7 2 8
B R N G R Y R E D
T E L C O
H O U S E
Brn Gry
Grn Red
DB-8 Cord
RJ-31X
Jack
Green
Brown
Gray
Red
A
B
C
D
Do not plug in the power transformer at this time. The panel must be powered up using
the sequence of steps described in the next section, “Powering Up the Panel.”
Caution
!
+
_
Panel
Backup Battery Connections
Battery
Red
Black
12
1 6 . 5 V A C
Terminals
Concord
23
Powering Up the Panel
After connecting and wiring all devices to the panel, you are ready to apply AC and backup bat-
tery power to the panel.
¾To power up the panel (see Figure 27):
1. Connect the red and black battery leads (included with panel) to the lugs on the panel.
2. Connect the other ends of the battery leads to the battery terminals.
3. Plug the transformer into an outlet that is not controlled by a switch.
Alphanumeric touchpads display ************, then SCANNING BUS DEVICES, and finally a
date and time display.
Note
If alphanumeric touchpads
don’t display anything,
immediately unplug the
transformer and disconnect
the backup battery. Refer to
the “Troubleshooting” sec-
tion.
4. To permanently mount the transformer, unplug it and remove the existing screw securing the
AC outlet cover.
Hold the outlet cover in place and plug the transformer into the lower receptacle.
5. Use the screw supplied with the transformer to secure the transformer to the outlet cover.
Programming
the Panel
For on-site system programming, an alphanumeric touchpad is required.
Entering Program Mode
Entering program mode is done using an installer/dealer code (default = 4321). The system can
be put into program mode only when all partitions are disarmed.
Note
If the system is powered up
after the programming
touchpad is connected or if a
bus command scan is exe-
cuted, the programming
touchpad will be “learned”
into the system and must
later be manually deleted.
¾To enter program mode:
1. Make sure the system is disarmed in all partitions.
2. Press 8 + 4321 + 0 + 0. The display shows SYSTEM PROGRAMMING.
¾To enter programming mode using a programming touchpad:
1. Connect the red, black, green, and white wires from the Programming Touchpad Cable
(60-791) to the power and bus wires/terminals on an alphanumeric touchpad, matching the
+12V (red), Bus A (green), Bus B (white), and GND (black) on each.
2. Make sure the system is powered up and disarmed.
3. Connect the plug on the cable onto the panel programming touchpad header (see Figure 28).
4. Press 8 + 4321 + 0 + 2. The touchpad sounds one short beep. Press * and verify that the dis-
play shows SERVICE TOUCHPAD ACTIVE.
5. Press 8 + 4321 + 0 + 0 and the display shows SYSTEM PROGRAMMING.
6. After programming is completed, simply disconnect the touchpad from the panel header.
Figure 28. Connecting a Programming Touchpad
Use extreme caution when securing the transformer to a metal outlet cover. You could
receive a serious shock if a metal outlet cover drops down onto the prongs of the plug
while you are securing the transformer and cover to the outlet box.
Warning
!
6 0 7 3 4 G 3 0 8 D . D S F
S t a tu s
F e a t u re s
p r e s s b o t h
L i g h t s
S y s t e m
A w a y
P a g e r
O f f
N o D e la y
p r e s s b o t h
p r e s s b o t h
T e s t S y s t e m W e e k l y
S il e n t
S ta y
D
*
7
0 #
8
B
A
4
1
56
23
B y p a s s
M e n u
C9
Programming
Touchpad
Cable (60-791)
Concord 24
Touchpad Button Programming Functions
In program mode, touchpad buttons let you navigate to all installer programming menus for con-
figuring the system. Table 5 describes the touchpad button functions in program mode.
Moving Through Program Mode Tiers and Menus
There are two basic tiers of programming menus (see Figure 29).
Tier 1 Menus Tier 2 Menus
Figure 29. Tier 1 and Tier 2 Program Menus
Arrows pointing right or down represent pressing B or # to advance forward through the menus.
Arrows pointing left or up represent pressing A or * to move through the menus in reverse. Only
when SYSTEM PROGRAMMING is displayed can you advance to tier 2 menus.
Only when a specific menu is displayed can you advance to those menu settings. For example,
from the SENSORS menu pressing # gives you access to learning sensors, programming sensor
text, deleting sensors, and viewing/editing sensor programming. Settings in tier 2 menus can also
be accessed by entering shortcut numbers. See the section, “Programming Tier 2 Menu Items”
for complete details.
Table 5: Touchpad Button Functions
Button Programming Function
#Selects menu item or data entry.
*Deselects menu item or data entry (if pressed before #).
A (c)
B (d)Scroll through available options at the current menu tier. Also scroll through sen-
sor text options during sensor text programming.
CEnters pauses when programming phone numbers.
DDeletes certain programmed settings.
0 thru 9Enter numeric values wherever needed.
1 & 2Select off (1) or on (2) wherever needed.
1 thru 6Press and hold to enter alphabetical characters A thru F for account numbers.
7 & 9Press and hold to enter * (7) or # (9) for phone numbers.
SYSTEM PRO-
GRAMMING
#SECURITY B
APHONES B
A
PHONE
OPTIONS
B
ATIMERS B
A
BA####
B
A
LIGHT
CONTROL
B
A
TOUCHPAD
OPTIONS
B
AREPORTING B
A
SIREN
OPTIONS
B
A
####
B
ASENSORS B
A
AUDIO
VERIFICATION
B
A
ACCESSORY
MODULES
B
A
ONBOARD
OPTIONS
B
A
####
B
AMACRO KEYS
Concord
25
Programming Tier 1 Menu Items
This section guides you through programming tier 1 menu items as they appear in sequence. The
exact order you follow will depend on whether you’re installing a new system or changing pro-
gramming in an existing system.
Demo Kit Mode (System Programming)
(Default = off) Determines whether the panel is used for a standard installation (off) or as a demo
kit (on). When the Demo Kit option is on, only sensors learned into groups 01 and 03, duress
code use, and phone test (8 + System Master Code + 2) will be reported. Turning on this feature
and performing a memory clear changes the following settings:
• Partition 1 Master Code = 1000
• Partition 2 Master Code = 2000
• User Code 00 = 1001 (partition 1 code—can also be used to jump to partition 2)
• User Code 01 = 1002 (partition 1 code—can also be used to bypass sensors)
• User Code 02 = 2001 (partition 2 code—can also be used for remote or off-site access)
• User Code 03 = 2002 (partition 2 code—can also be used to perform system tests)
• User Code 04 = 1122 (partition 1 code—can also be used to jump to partition 2, for remote
or off-site access, and system tests)
• User Code 05 = 2233 (partition 2 code—can also be used to jump to partition 1, for remote
or off-site access, bypassing sensors, and system tests)
• Partition 1 House Code = 255 (P)
• Partition 2 House Code = 254 (O)
• Zone 1 (hardwire input 1) = Group 10, Front Door
• Zone 2 (hardwire input 2) = Group 13, Bedroom Window
• Zone 3 (hardwire input 3) = Group 17, Living Room Motion Sensor
• Zone 4 (hardwire input 4) = Group 1, Panic
• Zone 5 (wireless, keychain touchpad, ID F00201) = Group 01, (no text)
• Zone 6 (wireless, DWS, ID A00206) = Group 13, Kitchen Window
• COMM FAILURE = off Demo Kit = on
• AVM code = 1212
• Entry Delay = 8 sec
• Exit Delay = 8 sec
• Extended Delay = 1 minute
• Siren Timeout = 2 minutes
¾To turn Demo Kit Mode off or on:
1. With the display showing DEMO KIT MODE OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on),
then press #.
2. The display flashes the entered setting, then stops after pressing # and displays DEMO KIT
MODE OFF/ON (new setting).
Partition 1 Copy (System Programming)
(Default = none) After programming all settings pertaining to partition 1, you can make an exact
copy to use for partitions 2-6. This helps reduce programming time when the system is set up for
multiple partitions. If there are certain settings that are unique to partitions 2-6, simply advance
to the appropriate menu and make the necessary changes.
¾To Copy Partition 1:
With the display showing PARTITION 1 COPY, press # + installer CODE + #. The display
flashes, then stops after pressing # and shows DONE.
Clear Memory (System Programming)
Clearing memory deletes all existing programming information (except the Dealer Code).
Note
Clearing the memory will
erase onboard hardwire
zone factory programming.
¾To Clear Panel Memory:
1. With the system in program mode, press A or B until the display shows CLEAR MEMORY.
2. Press # and the display shows ENTER CODE TO CLEAR MEMORY.
3. Enter the 4-digit installer or dealer code (if programmed) + #. After about five seconds, the
system restarts and the panel scans the bus to learn all bus devices.
If the system doesn’t respond as described, repeat step 3.
Concord 26
Programming Tier 2 Menu Items
This section guides you through programming tier 2 menu items as they appear in sequence. Fig-
ure 27 shows the menus available on tier 2.
Each menu on tier 2 represents a group of settings related to the menu name. Some tier 2 menus
break down into settings that affect the whole system (global) or a specific partition.
Using Shortcut Numbers
To go directly to a setting in tier 2, you can enter the shortcut number for that setting. Shortcut
numbers in this manual appear in parenthesis ( ), next to the setting name. For example, this
heading shows the Downloader Code global shortcut to be 0000.
Menus with partition settings have the series of shortcut numbers in parenthesis. For example,
this heading shows the Account Number partition shortcut number series to be 0010 - 0060.
The bold digit identifies the partition. To go directly to partition 3 account number, you would
enter 0030.
Shortcut numbers can be used from any setting location within tier 2.
¾To advance to tier 2 program menus:
With the system in program mode and the display showing SYSTEM PROGRAMMING, press #
once. The display should show SECURITY.
Security Menu
The SECURITY menu lets you choose whether security settings affect the whole system (global) or
a specific partition.
¾To access global or partition security menu items:
1. With the display showing SECURITY, press #. The display should show GLOBAL.
2. Press # again to advance to global settings, or press A or B to display PARTITION n, then press
# to advance to selected partition 1-6 settings.
The following describes how to program the Security settings that appear under GLOBAL.
Downloader Code (0000) Security-Global (Default = 12345)
Account Number (0010 - 0060) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = 00000)
Downloader Code (0000) Security-Global (Default = 12345)
The 5-digit downloader code is used in conjunction with downloader pro-
gramming. The down-loader operator must have the panel account number
and downloader code in order to perform any programming.
Note
The Downloader Code cannot be deleted from panel memory. To change the
Downloader Code to its default setting, enter 12345 in the procedure to the right.
The Downloader Code will be reset to defaults during a Memory Clear only if the
Dealer Code is not set OR if the Dealer Code is used to initiate the Memory Clear.
¾To program a Downloader Code:
1. With the display showing DOWNLOADER
CODE nnnnn (current code), enter the desired
5-digit code, + ƒ. The display flashes the
entered code.
2. Press ƒ and the display shows the new
code.
Installer Code (0001) Security-Global (Default = 4321)
The 4-digit installer code is used for entering program mode and changing
system settings. If a dealer code is programmed, only those settings not
associated with phone numbers and the Downloader Code can be changed.
Note
The Installer Code cannot be deleted or cleared from panel memory. To change
the Installer Code to its default setting, enter 4321.
¾To program a Installer Code:
1. With the display showing INSTALLER CODE
nnnn (current code), enter the desired 4-digit
code. The display flashes the entered code.
2. Press # and the display shows the new code.
Concord
27
Dealer Code (0002) Security-Global (Default = none)
The 4-digit dealer code is used to prevent unauthorized per-
sons from changing the programmed central station phone
numbers and Downloader Code. When this feature is enabled,
central station phone numbers and Downloader Code cannot
be changed (unless you enter the program mode by using the
dealer code). All other system settings are still accessible by
entering the program mode with the installer code.
Note
The Dealer Code cannot be deleted by clearing panel memory.
¾To program a Dealer Code:
1. With the display showing DEALER CODE ****, enter the
desired 4-digit code. The display flashes the entered
code.
2. Press # and the display shows the new code.
¾To delete a Dealer Code:
1. With the display showing DEALER CODE nnnn (current
code), press D. The display shows DEALER CODE ****.
Access Code Lock (0003) Security-Global (Default = on)
This setting determines whether or not the panel will include Access
Codes when sending user information to the automation module. When
this option is on, it means the Access Codes are not sent.
¾To turn Access Code Lock off or on:
1. With the display showing ACCESS CODE LOCK
ON/OFF
, press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Partition Security (0004) Security-Global (Default = on)
Controls whether an access code is required for partition jumping. When turned
on, users can jump partitions without an access code by pressing 7 + 4 + PTN n
(n = 1-6). When turned off, users must jump partitions with an access code by
pressing 8 + CODE + 6 + PTN.
Note
Regardless of the setting, an access code can always be used to jump partitions.
¾To turn Partition Security off or on:
1. With the display showing PTN SECURITY
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
setting.
Multi-Partition Arm/Disarm (0005) Security-Global (Default = none)
Controls which partitions can be armed/disarmed simultaneously when using a
touchpad and access code assigned to those partitions. When enabled, users can
arm/disarm selected partitions using an authorized access code. When disabled,
multiple partitions cannot be armed/disarmed simultaneously.
• At least two partitions must be selected for this feature to work.
• Touchpads must be assigned to at least one of the selected partitions of this
menu for this feature to work.
• Access codes must be assigned to all selected partitions of this menu for
this feature to work. If the partition assignment for a specific access code
does not match the partitions selected in this menu, only those partitions
common to both menu settings can be armed/disarmed simultaneously
with that code.
• A partition cannot be armed/disarmed if it is being controlled by another
source at that time.
• All arming modifiers (No Delay, Latchkey, Silent, etc.) affect all partitions
being armed.
• When arming multiple partitions, any conditions that prevent arming
(open sensor, trouble, active alarm, etc.) are identified on touchpad dis-
plays with the affected partition number flashing. The normal protest/auto
force arm sequence follows, or pressing * cancels the arming request.
• When disarming multiple partitions, any partitions in alarm have the
affected partition number flashing on touchpad displays. Pressing # can-
cels all alarms in the selected partitions. Alarm memory information is
then displayed for all canceled alarms.
¾To enable Multi-Partition Arm/Disarm:
1. With the display showing MULTI-PTN
ARM/DISARM _, press 1-6 to enter the
desired partitions (at least two). The dis-
play flashes the entered partitions.
2. Press # and the display stops flashing.
¾To disable Multi-Partition Arm/Disarm:
1. With the display showing MULTI-PTN
ARM/DISARM n n n n n n n, select all of the
displayed partitions by entering the
appropriate partition number. The parti-
tion numbers disappear from the display.
2. Press #.
Concord 28
Keychain TP PTN (0006) Security-Global (Default = keychain TP parti-
tion assignment)
Controls which partitions the selected keychain touchpad can arm/disarm.
When enabled, the selected keychain touchpad can arm/disarm the parti-
tions selected in this menu. When disabled, the selected keychain touchpad
cannot arm/disarm multiple partitions.
• If no keychain touchpads are learned into panel memory, this menu
displays NOT AVAILABLE.
• When keychain touchpads are learned into panel memory, two sub-
menus appear. The first one lets you view keychain touchpad assign-
ments similar to that of viewing learned sensors (sensor #, partition
learned into, sensor group, etc.). The second sub-menu lets you view
and change the multi-partition arming assignments for that keychain
touchpad.
• At least two partitions must be selected for this feature to work.
• Keychain touchpads can arm/disarm multiple partitions only for those
partitions set up in the MULTI-PARTITION ARM/DISARM menu.
• A partition cannot be armed/disarmed if it is being controlled by
another source at that time.
• When arming multiple partitions from a keychain touchpad (press and
release Lock button), any conditions that prevent arming (open sensor,
trouble, active alarm, etc.) are identified on touchpad displays in the
partition where that condition exists. Touchpad displays in all other
partitions being armed display PROTEST. The normal protest/auto
force arm sequence follows, or pressing * on any touchpad in a parti-
tion being armed cancels the arming request. Pressing the Lock button
again during a protest bypasses any open sensors in the affected parti-
tions and arms those partitions.
• When disarming multiple partitions with a keychain touchpad and
alarms are active in one or more of the assigned partitions:
a). Protest beeps sound for five minutes in all partitions being dis-
armed; b). Partitions in alarm where sirens have timed out sound pro-
test beeps for five minutes; c). Partitions in alarm with active sirens
continue sounding the alarm.
In any case where alarms are active the premises may not be safe to
enter. The user has these options: 1). Leave and call for help from a
safe location; 2). If entering the premises anyway, go to a hardwired
touchpad and check the system status to determine the alarm. Disarm
and alarm memory is displayed for all assigned partitions; 3). Press
the keychain touchpad Unlock button a second time (within the five
minute protest period) to disarm all assigned partitions and cancel all
alarms, then go to a hardwire touchpad and check alarm memory.
¾To enable Keychain TP PTN:
1. Learn all keychain touchpads into panel
memory (see LEARN SENSORS menu).
2. Enter this menu (display showing KEYCHAIN
TP PTN), then press #. The display shows the
lowest touchpad sensor number assignment
such as:
S1 P1 G0 TP RF where S1 is sensor 1, P1 is
partition 1, G0 is sensor group 0, TP is
touchpad and RF is wireless.
3. Press # to accept this keychain touchpad or
press A or B until the desired keychain touch-
pad appears, then press #. The display shows
ARM PARTITION.
4. Enter the desired partitions 1-6 (at least
two). The display flashes the entered parti-
tions.
5. Press # and the display stops flashing.
¾To disable Keychain TP PTN:
1. Follow steps 2 and 3 above.
2. Enter the partition numbers that are displayed
(except for the partition you assigned the
touchpad when it was learned). Each will dis-
appear from the display with the touchpad’s
original partition number left flashing.
3. Press # and the display stops flashing.
SIA False Alarm Reduction (0007) Security-Global (Default = on)
Controls the following settings that are required by the SIA False Alarm Reduction Stan-
dard:
• Arming level changes made from wireless touchpads and keychain touchpads are
sounded (beeps) on exterior siren output (on) OR are not sounded on exterior siren out-
put (off).
Note
The siren output must be configured for “Exterior Siren” (016xx) and on the two onboard outputs
and SnapCard outputs only, for the arming level beeps to be annunciated.
• The Arming Always Silent feature is disabled for users if this setting is on OR can be
controlled by users if the setting is off. Silent Arming on Demand is not affected.
¾To turn SIA False Alarm
Reduction off or on:
1. With the display showing SIA
FALSE ALARM (current setting),
press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered set-
ting.
2. Press ƒ and the display shows
the new setting.
Concord
29
The following sections describe the Security settings that appear under PARTITION 1-6.
Account Number (0010 - 0060) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = 00000)
The account number is used as panel (or customer) identification for the cen-
tral monitoring station. The panel sends the account number every time it
reports to the central station. Account numbers must be 1 to 10 characters
long.
Alpha characters A–F can be assigned to the account number by pressing
and holding buttons 1–6 respectively, until the character appears.
¾To program an Account Number:
1. With the display showing ACCOUNT NUM-
BER nnnnn (current number), enter the
desired account number. The display
flashes the entered number.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
number.
Quick Arm (0011 - 0061) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
Quick Arm allows system arming without using an access code. When
Quick Arm is on, the system arming level can be increased from Level 1-
OFF to LEVEL 2-STAY, from Level 1-OFF to LEVEL 3-AWAY, or from
Level 2-STAY to LEVEL 3-AWAY, without entering an access code.
A valid access code is still required to decrease the arming level or disarm
the system.
¾To turn Quick Arm off or on:
1. With the display showing QUICK ARM OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Quick Exit (0012 - 0062) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether or not users can open and close a standard entry/exit
door without causing an alarm (while the system is armed).
This feature would be useful if the user wants to go out to get the morning paper
while the system is armed. This feature also allows the user to leave the armed pre-
mises without having to disarm and re-arm the system.
When Quick Exit is on, pressing D on a touchpad (while the system is armed) starts a
2-minute timer that allows one standard entry/exit door (sensor groups 10 and 19
only) to be activated once (opened, then closed).
When this feature is turned off, the system must be disarmed before any protected
door is opened.
Note
For UL Listed installations, this feature must be set to off.
¾To turn Quick Exit off or on:
1. With the display showing QUICK
EXIT OFF/ON (current setting),
press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the
new setting.
Exit Extension (0013 - 0063) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether or not the user can re-enter and exit again through an
entry or exit delay door (without disarming and re-arming the system). This helps
prevent exit faults and false alarms by allowing users to re-enter the premises for a
forgotten item.
When Exit Extension is on, the panel restarts the exit delay timer if the user re-enters
the premises through a standard delay door before the standard exit delay time
expires.
When this feature is off, the exit delay timer does not restart if the user re-enters the
premises, forcing the user to disarm the system to avoid setting off an accidental
alarm.
¾To turn Exit Extension off or on:
1. With the display showing EXIT
EXTENSION OFF/ON (current set-
ting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the
new setting.
Concord 30
Auto Stay Arming (0014 - 0064) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether or not the system automatically arms to STAY
(level 2) if the user arms the system to AWAY (level 3) without exiting the pre-
mises. This can help prevent accidental alarms by deactivating interior motion
sensors during occupied arming periods.
Note
Arming the system to “AWAY with No Delay” overrides the Auto Stay Arming feature.
When this feature is on and the system is armed to AWAY, touchpads (and other
status sounders) emit one exit delay beep every four seconds, then one every sec-
ond during the last 10 seconds. If the exit delay time expires with no standard
delay sensor activation (sensor groups 10 or 19), the system automatically arms
to STAY.
¾To turn Auto Stay Arming off or on:
1. With the display showing AUTO STAY
ARMING OFF/ON (current setting),
press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
setting.
Keyswitch Sensor (0015 - 0065) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = none)
This feature lets users arm and disarm the system using either a keyswitch wired
to a hardwire zone input or a wireless door/window sensor.
Note
It is recommended that keyswitch sensors are learned into group 28.
For example, if sensor 1 is designated as the keyswitch sensor and the system is
disarmed, then tripping sensor 1 could arm the system to AWAY. If the system is
armed to STAY or AWAY, then tripping the sensor could disarm the system
(depending on keyswitch style).
The panel reports opening, closing, and force armed reports (if turned on) to the
central monitoring station.
Note
A bypassed keyswitch sensor cannot arm or disarm the system.During an audible
alarm, keyswitch sensors can disarm the system (which sends a cancel report to the
central monitoring station), but cannot arm the system. The system can be armed only
after the siren timeout expires.Keyswitch sensors test the same as any other sensor
and do not arm or disarm the system during a sensor test.
¾To assign a Keyswitch Sensor:
1. With the display showing KEYSWITCH
SENSOR nn (current sensor number),
enter the desired sensor number (01–
96). The display flashes the entered
sensor number.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
number.
¾To delete a Keyswitch Sensor:
1. With the display showing KEYSWITCH
SENSOR nn (current sensor number),
press D to erase the keyswitch sensor
attribute.
Keyswitch Style (0016 - 0066) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = transition)
This feature allows users to select how they want the system to behave when
armed/disarmed by a keyswitch sensor. The choices are as follows:
Transition: If keyswitch style is set to transition and the keyswitch sensor is
tripped (opened) when the system is disarmed (level 1), the panel will auto-
matically arm to AWAY (level 3). If the sensor is tripped (opened) when the
system is armed to AWAY (level 3) or STAY (level 2), the panel will automat-
ically disarm.
State: If keyswitch style is set to state, when the keyswitch sensor is tripped
(opened) the panel arms to AWAY (level 3). If the sensor is restored (closed)
the panel disarms.
Opening, closing, and force arming reports (if turned on) are reported to the
central station for both keyswitch styles.
¾To assign a Keyswitch Style:
1. With the display showing KEYSWITCH
STYLE TRANSITION/STATE (current setting),
press 1 for Transition or 2 for State. The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Concord
31
Phones Menu
The PHONES menu lets you set up central station reporting for the system. The following
describes how to program the settings that appear under CS PHONE 1-3.
Duress Code (0017 - 0067) Security-Partition 1-6 (Default = none)
The duress code is a unique 4-digit access code that allows users to operate
the system and, at the same time, instructs the panel to send a silent alarm
report to the central station.
Do not use a duress code unless it is absolutely necessary. Using duress codes
often results in false alarms due to code entry errors. If a duress code is abso-
lutely necessary, use it with an audio verification module (AVM) to reduce
false alarms and accidental dispatches.
Note
To use this feature, the Duress Option setting under the reporting—partition 1 (2) menu
must be turned on.
¾To program a Duress Code:
1. With the display showing DURESS CODE
****, enter the desired 4-digit duress code.
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
code.
¾To delete a Duress Code:
1. With the display showing DURESS CODE
nnnn (current code), press D. The display
shows DURESS CODE ****.
Phone Number (cs phone 1: 01000, cs phone 2: 01010,
cs phone 3: 01020)
Phones-CS 1-3 (Default = none)
This setting is used for programming the central station receiver phone number.
Phone numbers can be 1 to 24 digits long, including pauses or * and # characters.
To enter pauses, press C.
To enter *, press and hold 7 for about two seconds.
To enter #, press and hold 9 for about two seconds.
Note
The PHONE NUMBER menus are not accessible if a Dealer Code is programmed and the
Installer Code is used to enter installer programming mode. To access these menus
when a Dealer Code is programmed, you must enter installer programming mode using
the Dealer Code.
Call-waiting services should be disabled to prevent interrupting panel communication to
the central monitoring station. To program a dialing prefix that disables call-waiting, see
the Call Wait Cancel setting under the menu PHONE OPTIONS—GLOBAL.
For UL 1610 & 1635 installations, a phone number must be programmed.
¾To program a Central Station Phone
Number:
1. With the display showing PHONE
NUMBER _ (or current number), enter
the desired phone number. The display
flashes the entered number.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
number.
¾To delete a Central Station Phone
Number:
With the display showing PHONE
NUMBER (current number), press D.
The display shows PHONE NUMBER _.
High Level Rpts (cs phone 1: 01001, cs phone 2: 01011,
cs phone 3: 01021)
Phones-CS 1-3 (Defaults:1 = on, 2&3 = off)
When this setting is on, the following conditions report to the central sta-
tion:
• Fire, Police, Auxiliary, and Duress alarms
•No Activity
• Receiver Failure (or jam)
• Tamper conditions, including Zone Tampers and System Tamper (40
incorrect key presses or touchpad supervisory)
• Entering or exiting Sensor Test mode
• Phone Test
Note
For UL 1610 & 1635 installations, this feature must be set to on.
¾To turn High-Level Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing HIGH LEVEL RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Concord 32
Low Level Rpts (cs phone 1: 01002, cs phone 2: 01012,
cs phone 3: 01022)
Phones-CS 1-3 (Defaults:1 = on, 2&3 = off)
When this setting is on, the following non-alarm conditions report to the
central station:
• Force Armed
• Hardwire Zone Trouble (open or short)
• Supervisory (wireless devices)
• Low Battery (wireless devices)
• Phone Test
• Other non-alarm related conditions
Note
For UL 1610 & 1635 installations, this feature must be set to on.
¾To turn Low-Level Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing LOW LEVEL RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Exception Rpts (cs phone 1: 01003, cs phone 2: 01013,
cs phone 3: 01023)
Phones-CS 1-3 (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel reports to the central station if the sys-
tem is not armed or disarmed at the specified schedule times.
¾To turn Exception Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing EXCEPTION RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Open/Close Rpts (cs phone 1: 01004, cs phone 2: 01014,
cs phone 3: 01024)
Phones-CS 1-3 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether opening and closing reports are sent to
the central station. When turned on, the panel sends a closing report when
the system is armed and an opening report when the system is disarmed.
Note
To use this feature, the Opening Reports and Closing Reports settings under
the REPORTING menu must be turned on for that partition.
¾To turn Opening/Closing Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing OPEN/CLOSE RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Backup (cs phone 1: 01005, cs phone 2: 01015,
cs phone 3: 01025)
Phones-CS 1-3 (Defaults:1 = on, 2&3 = off)
This setting determines whether or not the panel uses another programmed
central station phone number for reporting if attempts with the first num-
ber are unsuccessful.
When Back Up is off, the panel will make up to eight attempts to deliver a
report with the programmed phone number.
When Back Up is set to on, the panel makes up to 16 attempts to deliver
the report, alternating between the programmed phone number and the
backup phone number.
CS PHONE 1 is backed up by CS PHONE 2.
CS PHONE 2 is backed up by CS PHONE 1.
CS PHONE 3 is backed up by CS PHONE 1.
¾To turn Backup off or on:
1. With the display showing BACK UP OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Concord
33
The following describes how to program the Phones settings that appear under PAGER PHONE 1-5.
SIA/CID Reporting (cs phone 1: 01006,
cs phone 2: 01016, cs phone 3: 01026)
Phones-CS 1-3 (Default = CID)
This setting determines whether the panel uses the SIA or CID (Contact
ID) reporting format for central station communication.
¾To select SIA or CID reporting:
1. With the display showing REPORTING FORMAT
SIA/CID (current setting), press 1 (for SIA) or 2
(for CID). The display flashes the entered set-
ting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Cellular Backup (cs phone 1: 01007, cs phone 2: 01017,
cs phone 3: 01027)
Phones-CS 1-3 (Defaults:1 = on, 2&3 = off)
This setting determines whether the panel uses cellular communication
for reporting if attempts using a landline are unsuccessful.
¾To turn Cellular Backup off or on:
1. With the display showing CELLULAR BACKUP,
press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the
entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Phone Number (pager 1: 01030, pager 2: 01040, pager 3:
01050, pager 4: 01060, pager 5: 01070)
Phones-Pager Phone 1-5 (Default = none)
This setting is used for programming a phone number that communicates
to a pager. Phone numbers can be 1 to 24 digits long and include pauses,
a skylink number, and 7-digit PIN number.
Note
Call-waiting services should be disabled to prevent interrupting panel commu-
nication to the pager(s). To program a dialing prefix that disables call-waiting,
see the Call Wait Cancel setting under the menu PHONE OPTIONS—GLOBAL.
To enter pauses, press C.
To enter *, press and hold 7 for about two seconds.
To enter #, press and hold 9 for about two seconds.
¾To program a Pager Phone Number:
1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER _
(or current number), enter the desired pager
phone number. The display flashes the entered
number.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
¾To delete a Pager Phone Number:
1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER
(current number), press D. The display shows
PHONE NUMBER _.
High Level Rpts (pager 1: 01031, pager 2: 01041, pager 3:
01051, pager 4: 01061, pager 5: 01071)
Phones-Pager Phone 1-5 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether the following alarm conditions report to a
pager:
• Fire, Police, Auxiliary, and Duress alarms
•No Activity
• Receiver Failure (or jam)
• Tamper conditions, including Zone Tampers and System Tamper (40
incorrect key presses or touchpad supervisory)
• Entering or exiting Sensor Test mode
• Phone Test
¾To turn High-Level Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing HIGH LEVEL RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Concord 34
Low Level Rpts (pager 1: 01032, pager 2: 01042, pager 3:
01052, pager 4: 01062, pager 5: 01072)
Phones-Pager Phone 1-5 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the following non-alarm conditions report
to a pager:
• Force Armed
• Hardwire Zone Trouble (open or short)
• Supervisory (wireless devices)
• Low Battery (wireless devices)
• Phone Test
• Other non-alarm related conditions
¾To turn Low-Level Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing LOW LEVEL RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Exception Rpts (pager 1: 01033, pager 2: 01043, pager 3:
01053, pager 4: 01063, pager 5: 01073)
Phones-Pager Phone 1-5 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the panel reports to a pager if the sys-
tem is not armed or disarmed at the specified schedule times, if open/
close reports are turned on.
¾To turn Exception Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing EXCEPTION RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Open/Close Rpts (pager 1: 01034, pager 2: 01044, pager 3:
01054, pager 4: 01064, pager 5: 01074)
Phones-Pager Phone 1-5 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether opening and closing reports are sent to a
pager. When turned on, the panel sends a closing report when the system
is armed and an opening report when the system is disarmed.
Note
To use this feature, the opening reports and closing reports settings under the
REPORTING menu must be turned on for that partition.
¾To turn Opening/Closing Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing OPEN/CLOSE RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Latchkey Reports (pager 1: 01035, pager 2: 01045, pager
3: 01055, pager 4: 01065, pager 5: 01075)
Phones-Pager Phone 1-5 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether the panel reports to a pager when the
system is armed or disarmed, according to latchkey time scheduling.
¾To turn Latchkey reports off or on:
1. With the display showing LATCHKEY RPTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Streamlining (pager 1: 01036, pager 2: 01046, pager 3:
01056, pager 4: 01066, pager 5: 01076)
Phones-Pager Phone 1-5 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether the panel includes (off) or excludes
(on) the account number when reporting to a pager.
¾To turn Streamlining off or on:
1. With the display showing STREAMLINING OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord
35
The following describes how to program the settings that appear under DOWNLOADER PHONE.
Phone Options Menu
The PHONE OPTIONS menu lets you set up system phone access and communications that affect
the whole system (global) or a specific partition.
The following describe how to program the Phone Options settings that appear under GLOBAL.
Ptn Assignment (pager 1: 01037, pager 2: 01047, pager
3: 01057, pager 4: 01067, pager 5: 01077)
Phones-Pager Phone 1-5 (Default = 1)
This setting determines the partition that reports to a pager. All parti-
tions can be assigned to report to a single pager.
¾To set up Partition Assignments for pager
reporting:
1. With the display showing PTN ASSIGNMENT 1/2/
12 (current setting), press 1-6 to select the
desired partitions. The display flashes the
entered settings.
2. Press # and the display stops flashing.
Phone Number (01090) Phones-Downloader Phone (Default = none)
Use this setting to enter the phone number of an off-site computer that
can be used to program the panel through the phone line. Phone numbers
can be 1 to 24 digits long, including pauses or * and # characters.
Note
Call-waiting services should be disabled to prevent interrupting panel commu-
nication to the downloader. To program a dialing prefix that disables call-wait-
ing, see the Call Wait Cancel setting under the menu PHONE OPTIONS—
GLOBAL.
To enter pauses, press C.
To enter *, press and hold 7 for about two seconds.
To enter #, press and hold 9 for about two seconds.
¾To program a downloader phone number:
1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER (cur-
rent number), enter the desired phone number.
The display flashes the entered number.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
¾To delete a downloader phone number:
1. With the display showing PHONE NUMBER (cur-
rent number), press D to erase the number. The
display shows PHONE NUMBER_.
Phone Test (02000) Phone Options-Global (Default = on)
This setting determines if the user can, at any time, test the communica-
tion from the panel to the central station or a pager by entering 8 +
CODE + 2 (# + 8 + CODE + 2 from a touch-tone phone).
Note
For UL 1610 & 1635 listed installations, this feature must be set to on.
¾To turn the Phone Test setting off or on:
1. With the display showing PHONE TEST OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Auto Phone Test (02001) Phone Options-Global (Default = off)
This setting determines if the panel sends a phone test automatically to the
central station or a pager on a predetermined schedule. (Refer to the
“Phone Test Freq.” and “Next Phone Test” settings found under TIMERS—
GLOBAL).
Note
For UL 1610 & 1635 listed installations, this feature must be set to on.
¾To turn Automatic Phone Test off or on:
1. With the display showing AUTO PHONE TEST
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Concord 36
Auto Test Reset (02002) Phone Options-Global (Default =
on)
This setting determines whether or not the Auto Phone Test interval is reset after any
successful report to the central monitoring station. (Refer to the “Phone Test Freq.”
and “Next Phone Test” settings found under TIMERS—GLOBAL).
When this feature is on, the panel considers any successful report to the central mon-
itoring station to be a successful phone test. Thus, any panel report resets the Next
Phone Test setting to the Phone Test Freq. value. The panel only conducts an Auto
Phone Test if no other reports have been made during the Phone Test Freq. time
period.
Note
Phone Test Freq must be set to 2 or higher for Auto Test Reset to work.
When this feature is off, an Auto Phone Test is always conducted according to the
schedule of the Phone Test Freq. setting, even if the panel makes other reports to the
central monitoring station during that time period.
¾To turn Auto Test Reset off or on:
1. With the display showing AUTO
TEST RESET OFF/ON (current set-
ting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the
new setting.
Comm Failure (02003) Phone Options-Global (Default = on)
This setting determines whether the panel activates trouble beeps to alert users on
the premises that communication to the central station failed. Failure notification
occurs after the third unsuccessful reporting attempt to the central station/pager.
Failure notification can occur immediately if inadequate phone line voltage is
detected upon the initial dialing attempt.
Note
For UL Listed installations, Comm Failure must be turned on.
¾To turn Communication Failure notifi-
cation off or on:
1. With the display showing COMM
FAILURE OFF/ON (current setting),
press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the
new setting.
DTMF Dialing (02004) Phone Options-Global (Default = on)
This setting determines whether the panel uses DTMF tones (on) or
pulse (off) for dialing programmed phone numbers.
¾To turn DTMF Dialing off or on:
1. With the display showing DTMF DIALING OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Dialer Abort (02006) Phone Options-Global (Default = on)
This setting determines whether or not the user can stop a panel before it
sends a false alarm to the central station.
Note
Fire alarm reports to the central station cannot be aborted.
When this feature is on, alarm reports from sensors in groups 00–20, 34,
and 35 can be aborted. To abort the dialing attempt, the user must enter 1 +
user code within the Dialer Abort Delay time setting (defaulted to 30 sec).
Cancel and restoral reports from these sensor groups are aborted at the
same time. The following reports can also be aborted.
• System Alarm Tamper/Cancel
• No Activity Alarm/Cancel
• Touchpad Police and Auxiliary Panic/Cancel
• Recent Closing and Two Trip Error
¾To turn Dialer Abort off or on:
1. With the display showing DIALER ABORT
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Concord
37
Dialer Abort Delay (02007) Phone Options-Global (Default = 30 sec.)
This setting determines how much time the user has to abort a panel
report.
Note
For UL Listed systems, the combined time for the Entry Delay and Dialer
Abort Delay must not exceed 60 seconds.
¾To change the Dial Abort Delay:
1. With the display showing DIAL ABORT DELAY nn
SECS (current setting), enter the desired time
(15–45). The display flashes the entered set-
ting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Cancel Message (02008) Phone Options-Global (Default = on)
This setting determines whether or not the panel displays a cancel mes-
sage after the user disarms the system to clear an alarm condition.
¾To turn Cancel Message off or on:
1. With the display showing CANCEL MESSAGE
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Pager Delay (02009) Phone Options-Global (Default = 15 sec.)
This setting determines how long a report is delayed to a pager, after the
panel dials the pager number.
Note
The Pager Delay time should not be set below 5 seconds, unless absolutely
necessary.
¾To set the Pager Delay time:
1. With the display showing PAGER DELAY nn SECS
(current setting), enter a delay time (0–30).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Call Wait Cancel (02010) Phone Options-Global (Default = none)
This feature lets you set up a dialing prefix to disable the call waiting
feature before the panel makes its first dialing attempt to any pro-
grammed central monitoring station or downloader phone number. The
prefix can be up to eight digits.
To enter pauses, press C.
To enter *, press and hold 7 for one second.
To enter #, press and hold 9 for one second.
¾To set up Call Wait Cancel:
1. With the display showing CALL WAIT CANCEL
__ (or current setting), enter the desired prefix.
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
¾To delete the Call Wait Cancel prefix:
1. With the display showing CALL WAIT CANCEL
__ (or current setting), press D.
DO NOT change this option from its default until verifying with
the customer that they have call waiting with their phone service
provider. Changing this option from its default without call waiting
will prohibit the panel from calling the central station.
Caution
!
Dial Tone Detect (02011) Phone Options-Global (Default = on)
When this setting is on, the panel begins dialing as soon as it detects a
dial tone. When this feature is off, the panel begins dialing a few sec-
onds after seizing the phone line.
Note
There is no Dial Tone Detect on the last dialing attempt.
¾To set up Dial Tone Detect:
1. With the display showing DIAL TONE DETECT
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord 38
The following sections describe the Phone Options settings that appear under PARTITION 1-6.
A Phone Interface/Voice Module must be installed for the system to use the settings under PHONE
OPTIONS— PARTITION 1-6 (except Line Fail Delay).
Local Phone Control (0210 - 0260) Phone Options-Partition 1-6(Default = on)
When this feature is on, the panel can be accessed from a phone on the
premises.
¾To set up Local Phone Control:
1. With the display showing LOCAL PHONE CTRL
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Remote Access (0211 - 0261) Phone Options-Partition 1-6 (Default = on)
When this setting is on, the panel can be accessed from an off-site
phone.
¾To turn Remote Access off or on:
1. With the display showing REMOTE ACCESS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Ring/Hang/Ring (0212 - 0262) Phone Options-Partition 1-6 (Default = on)
This setting determines how the panel picks up (seizes) the phone line. Select
“on” if an answering machine shares the phone line with the panel. Select
“off” if there is no answering machine sharing the phone line with the panel.
Note
The Remote Access setting must be turned on for this feature to work.
When this feature is on, the person who is calling the panel must use the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Listen for one or two full rings.
2. Hang up.
3. Call the premises again within the next 10–40 seconds. The system
answers after the first ring.
When this feature is off, the system answers after 12 full rings.
¾To turn Ring/Hang/Ring access off or on:
1. With the display showing RING/HANG/
RING OFF/ON (current setting), press 1
(off) or 2 (on). The display begins flash-
ing the entered selection.
2. Press # and the display shows the new set-
ting.
Line Fail Delay (partition 1: 0213) Phone Options-Partition 1 only (Default = none)
This setting determines the amount of time the partition 1
phone line voltage must be absent before the panel indicates
a phone failure trouble condition. If a delay is not pro-
grammed (default), the panel will not monitor the phone line
voltage.
Note
Line Fail Delay is not available for partitions 2-6 at this time.
¾To set the Line Fail Delay time:
1. With partition 1 selected, press A or B until the display
shows LINE FAIL DELAY nn SECS (current setting).
2. Enter the desired time value (10–240 seconds). The display
flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows
the new setting.
¾To delete the Line Fail Delay time:
1. With partition 1 selected, press A or B until the display
shows LINE FAIL DELAY nn SECS (current setting).
2. Press D to delete the current line fail delay time.
Concord
39
Timers Menu
The TIMERS menu lets you set up the various system feature times that affect the whole system
(global) or a specific partition.
The following describes how to program the Timers settings that appear under GLOBAL.
Toll Saver (0214 - 0264) Phone Options-Partition 1-6 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether the panel answers a phone
call on the eighth ring (on) or twelfth ring (off) when a
trouble or alarm condition exists.
¾To turn Toll Saver off or on:
1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B until the dis-
play shows TOLL SAVER OFF/ON (current setting).
2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting.
Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Phone Panic (0215 - 0265) Phone Options-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether or not a police panic alarm
can be activated from a touch-tone phone. When this feature is
on, pressing # + ****** from a touch-tone phone on the pre-
mises causes a panic alarm.
¾To turn Phone Panic off or on:
1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B until the
display shows PHONE PANIC OFF/ON (current setting).
2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered
setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Phone Access Key (0216 - 0266) Phone Options-Partition 1-6 (Default = #)
This setting determines which touch-tone phone button is used for system
access and control.
If the Local Phone Control feature is enabled, the user can pick up the phone
and press # (within 5 seconds) to access the security system. The panel seizes
the phone line and waits for the user to enter system commands. Phone access
can be changed from # to * (see the following note).
Note
Use the default setting (#) to avoid conflicts between the security system and other
phone devices and services. Many phone devices (such as answering machines,
computer modems, and FAX machines) and services (such as call-waiting, call-for-
warding, and some banking transactions) require * to initiate their operation, so using
* for this security feature could cause conflicts.
¾To change the Phone Access Key:
1. With the desired partition selected, press
A or B until the display shows PHONE
ACCESS KEY #/* (current setting).
2. Press 1 (for *) or 2 (for #). The display
flashes the entered setting. Press # and
the display shows the new setting.
Supervisory Time (0300) Timers-Global (Default = set randomly
between 01:00 and 04:00)
This setting determines what time of day the panel sends supervisory,
low battery, or auto phone test reports to the central station.
Note
The panel clock must be set with the correct time for accurate supervisory
time reporting. See “Time and Date Menu”.
¾To set the Supervisory Time:
1. With the display showing SUPERVISORY TIME
HH:MM (current setting), enter the desired 4-
digit time value. For example, enter 0330 to
set the supervisory time for 3:30 A.M. The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord 40
RF Tx Timeout (0302) Timers-Global (Default = 12 hours)
This setting determines how many hours (2–24) the panel has to receive at least
one signal from a wireless sensor (learned into a supervised group). If the panel
does not receive a signal from any supervised wireless sensor within the set time,
the panel reports a supervisory condition to the central station.
Note
For UL 985, 1610 & 1635 listed installations, the RF Tx Timeout must be set to 4 hours.
For UL 1023 listed installations, the RF Tx Timeout must be set to 24 hours.
¾To set the RF Tx Timeout:
1. With the display showing RF TX TIME-
OUT nn HOURS (current setting), enter
the desired timeout value (2–24). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
setting.
Phone Test Freq. (0303) Timers-Global (Default = 7 days)
This setting determines how often the panel conducts the automatic phone
test (see “Auto Phone Test” under PHONE OPTIONS—GLOBAL). The system
can be set to perform an automatic phone test anywhere from every day to
every 255 days.
Note
For UL 1610 & 1635 listed installations, this feature must be set to 1.
¾To set the Phone Test Freq:
1. With the display showing PHONE TEST FREQ
nnn DAYS (current setting), enter the number of
days (1–255). The display flashes the entered
setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Next Phone Test (0304) Timers-Global (Default = 7 days)
This setting is used by the Auto Phone Test feature (see PHONE OPTIONS—
GLOBAL) to determine when the next automatic phone test should occur.
This setting should be the same as, or less than, the Phone Test Freq. set-
ting.
Note
For UL 1610 & 1635 listed installations, this feature must be set to 1.
¾To set the Next Phone Test:
1. With the display showing NEXT PHONE TEST
nnn DAYS (current setting), enter the number of
days (1–255). The display flashes the entered
setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Output Trip Time (0305) Timers-Global (Default = 4 sec.)
This setting determines how long outputs are activated
when tripped (if they are configured for a momentary
response).
¾To set the Output Trip Time:
1. With the display showing OUTPUT TRIP TIME nn SECS (current
setting), enter the number of seconds (1–12). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Activity Timeout (0306) Timers-Global (Default = 24 hours)
This setting determines when the system sends a “no activity” report.
The panel can be set to wait from 1–42 hours. If no user interaction or
device activation occurs in that time, the panel sends a report to the cen-
tral station.
¾To set the Activity Timeout:
1. With the display showing ACTIVITY TIMEOUT
nn HOURS (current setting), enter the number
of hours (1–42). The display flashes the
entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Daylight Saving (0307) Timers-Global (Default = on)
When this setting is on, the panel clock automatically adjusts for daylight
saving time changes.
¾To turn Daylight Saving off or on:
1. With the display showing DAYLIGHT SAVING
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2
(on). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord
41
The following sections describe the settings that appear under PARTITION 1-6.
Entry Delay (0310 - 0360) Timers-Partition 1-6 (Default = 30 sec.)
This setting determines how much time the user has to disarm the system
(after entering the armed premises through a “designated delay door”)
without causing an alarm.
Note
For UL 1023 Listed installations, the Entry Delay must be set to 45 seconds or
less. The combined time for the Entry Delay and Dialer Abort Delay (02006)
must not exceed 60 seconds.
¾To set the Entry Delay:
1. With the display showing ENTRY DELAY nnn
SECS (current setting), enter the desired time
value (30–240). The display flashes the
entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Exit Delay (0311 - 0361) Timers-Partition 1-6 (Default = 60 sec.)
This setting determines how much time the user has (after arming the sys-
tem) to leave the premises through a “designated delay door” without
causing an alarm.
Note
For UL 1023 listed installations, this feature must be set to 60 seconds or less.
For UL 1610 listed installations, this feature must be set to 120 seconds or less.
¾To set the Exit Delay:
1. With the display showing EXIT DELAY nnn
SECS (current setting), enter the desired time
value (45–184). The display flashes the
entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Extended Delay (0312 - 0362) Timers-Partition 1-6 (Default = 4 min.)
This setting determines how much time the user has (after arming the sys-
tem) to enter or exit the premises through a “designated extended delay
door” (1–8 minutes).
Note
For UL Listed installations Extended Delay may not be used.
¾To set the Extended Delay:
1. With the display showing EXTENDED DELAY n
MINUTES (current setting), enter the desired
time value (1–8). The display flashes the
entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Siren Timeout (0313 - 0363) Timers-Partition 1-6 (Default = 4 min.)
This setting determines how long sirens sound (1–30 minutes) if
no one is present to disarm the system.
Note
For UL Listed installations, the Siren Timeout must be set to 4 min-
utes or more.
¾To set the Siren Timeout:
1. With the display showing SIREN TIMEOUT nn MINUTES
(current setting), enter the desired time value (1–30).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display show the new setting.
Sleep Time (0314 - 0364) Timers-Partition 1-6 (Default = 22:00 [10:00 pm])
This setting determines the start time and restart of a 10-hour window
during which trouble beeps are suppressed. The initial occurrence of
an event that causes trouble beeps within this window will not sound
trouble beeps until the Sleep Time window expires. If trouble beeps
from a previous event are due to be restarted during the sleep time
window, they will be restarted one hour prior to Sleep Time.
Note
For UL listed installations, this feature must be set to off.
¾To set the Sleep Time:
1. With the display showing SLEEP TIME hh:mm (cur-
rent setting), enter the desired time value (00:00-
23:50 using 10 minute intervals). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display show the new setting.
¾To turn off Sleep Time:
1. With the display showing SLEEP TIME hh:mm (cur-
rent setting), press D.
Concord 42
Light Control Menu
Note
For light control to work, the
panel must be powered with
a power line carrier trans-
former and X10 Powerhouse
Lamp Modules must be
installed at desired lamps.
The LIGHT CONTROL menu lets you set up light activation for a specific partition.
The following describes how to program the settings that appear under PARTITION 1-6.
No Usage Time (0315 - 0365) Timers-Partition 1-6 (Default = none)
Determines how many days a partition can remain disarmed before
the panel sends a No Usage report to the central monitoring station
and stores the event in the history buffer.
When this feature is set:
• This timer decreases by one at STIME each day the selected par-
tition remains disarmed.
• If the timer gets to 0 at STIME, the panel sends a No Usage report
to the central monitoring station and stores the event in the his-
tory buffer.
• If the partition is armed before the timer reaches 0, the timer
resets to the programmed setting.
When this feature is not set (default), the panel does not send or log
No Usage reports.
¾To set the No Usage Time:
1. With the display showing NO USAGE TIME (cur-
rent setting), enter the desired number in days (2-
255). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display show the new setting.
¾To turn off No Usage Time:
1. With the display showing NO USAGE TIME (cur-
rent setting), press D.
Entry Lights (0400 - 0450) Light Control (Default = none)
This setting determines which X10 controlled lights turn on
during entry and exit delays.
Note
X10 Lamp Modules set to 1 always turn on during the entry and
exit delays.
X10 Lamp Modules set to 2 always flash the arming level when
arming the system. For example, lights flash two times when arm-
ing to STAY (level 2), and three times when arming to AWAY (level
3).
¾To set the Entry Lights:
1. With the desired partition selected, press #. The display
shows ENTRY LIGHTS nnnnnnn (current setting).
2. Enter all the desired light numbers (3–9 based on the
UNIT dial setting on each X10 Lamp Module). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting(s). Press # and the dis-
play shows the new setting(s).
¾To delete Entry Lights:
1. Enter any light number that appears on the display, then
press #. The number disappears from the display.
House Code (0401 - 0451) Light Control (Defaults: partition 1=01-B,
partition 2=02-C, partition 3=03-D, partition 4=
04-E, partition 5=05-F, partition 6=06-G)
This setting enables X10 controlled lights to work in a selected parti-
tion without interfering with the X10 controlled lights of the other
partitions.
After setting the panel house code for each partition, you must set the
X10 controlled lights for that partition to the same house code. The
letter that appears automatically after the house code number indicates
the necessary HOUSE dial setting for X10 modules in that partition.
¾To set the House Code:
1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B
until the display shows HOUSE CODE nn-x (current
setting).
2. Enter the desired number (1–255). The display
flashes the entered number. Press # and the dis-
play shows the new house code.
Concord
43
Touchpad Options Menu
The TOUCHPAD OPTIONS menu lets you set up touchpad panic and arming operation. The follow-
ing section describes the settings that appear under GLOBAL.
The following sections describe the settings that appear under PARTITION 1-6.
Latchkey Zones (0500) Touchpad Options-Global (Default = none)
This setting defines the range of keychain touchpads that
will function as a latchkey user. The value entered in this
section can be any valid zone number. When a zone number
is entered, all zones at or below that zone number will func-
tion as a latchkey user. For example, if 5 is entered, any
keychain touchpads learned into zones 1–5 will be latchkey
users and all others (6–96) will not.
¾To set the number of Latchkey Zones:
1. With the display showing LATCHKEY ZONES nnn (current set-
ting), enter the desired number of latchkey zones (1–96). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
¾To delete/disable Latchkey Zones:
1. With the display showing LATCHKEY ZONES nnn (current set-
ting), press D.
Fire Panic (0510 - 0560) Touchpad Options-Partitions 1-6 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether touchpad fire panic buttons are
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
¾To change the Fire Panic setting:
1. With the display showing FIRE PANIC OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Aux. Panic (0511 - 0561) Touchpad Options-Partitions 1-6 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether touchpad auxiliary panic buttons are
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
¾To change the Auxiliary Panic setting:
1. With the display showing AUXILIARY PANIC OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Police Panic (0512 - 0562) Touchpad Options-Partitions 1-6 (Default = on)
This setting determines whether touchpad police panic buttons are
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
¾To change the Police Panic setting:
1. With the display showing POLICE PANIC OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Keychain TP Arm (0513 - 0563) Touchpad Options-Partitions 1-6 (Default = off)
When this setting is on, pressing the lock button on keychain touch-
pads arms the system directly to AWAY with NO DELAY.
When this setting is off, each key-press increments the arming level
(i.e., from OFF to STAY, from STAY to AWAY).
¾To change the Keychain Touchpad Arming setting:
1. With the display showing KEYCHAIN TP ARM OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord 44
Reporting Menu
The REPORTING menu lets you set up which system events are reported to the central monitoring
station. The following describes how to program the settings that appear under GLOBAL.
Star Is No Delay (0514 - 0564) Touchpad Options-Partitions 1-6 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the keychain touchpad star button
controls an output (off) or the No Delay feature (on).
¾To change the keychain Star Is No Delay setting:
1. With the display showing STAR IS NO DELAY OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
24-Hour Tamper (06000) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel sounds sirens and reports a tamper
alarm (even when the system is disarmed), when wireless sensor
tamper switches are activated.
Note
For commercial UL Listed installations (UL 1610) the 24-Hour Tamper
must be set to on.
¾To turn 24-Hour Tamper off or on:
1. With the display showing 24 HOUR TAMPER OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Antenna Tamper (06001) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
Determines whether the panel monitors for antenna tamper of all
connected receivers and transceivers.
If this setting is on and 24-Hour Tamper is on, the panel sounds
sirens in partition 1 only and reports an antenna tamper alarm.
Other partitions show a trouble condition.
If this setting is off, the panel ignores antenna tampers.
¾To turn Antenna Tamper off or on:
1. With the display showing ANTENNA TAMPER OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Buffer Control (06002) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, only arming level changes and time
changes (system time and daylight savings time) are logged in the
buffer (memory) of the panel. When this setting is off, all system
events are logged in the buffer.
¾To turn Buffer Control off or on:
1. With the display showing BUFFER CONTROL OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Back In Service (06003) Reporting-Global (Default = on)
When this setting is on, the panel reports to the central station when
AC and backup battery power are restored (after an extended power
outage).
¾To turn Back In Service reports off or on:
1. With the display showing BACK IN SERVICE OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord
45
Bypass Reports (06004) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel reports to the central station
whenever sensors or zones are bypassed.
¾To turn Bypass Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing BYPASS REPORTS OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Low CPU Battery (06005) Reporting-Global (Default = on)
When this setting is on, the panel reports a low panel battery to the
central station before shutting down. If this feature and the Aux
Power Fail feature are both on, the panel also monitors for and
reports a low battery for the SuperBus 2000 2-Amp Power Supply.
Note
For UL 1635 listed installations, the Low CPU Battery feature must be
set to on.
¾To turn Low CPU Battery reports off or on:
1. With the display showing LOW CPU BATTERY OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Battery Restoral (06006) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
If this setting is on, the panel reports to the central monitoring sta-
tion when a wireless sensor or touchpad reports a battery replace-
ment to the panel.
¾To turn Battery Restoral reports off or on:
1. With the display showing BATTERY RESTORAL OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Buffer Full Rpt (06007) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel sends an “event buffer full” report
to the central monitoring station when the event buffer logs 225
entries. When turned off, no report is sent.
¾To turn Buffer Full Report off or on:
1. With the display showing BUFFER FULL RPT OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Zone Restorals (06008) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel reports a restoral to the central
monitoring station for wireless or hardwire zones in alarm before
the alarm is canceled.
Note
As with all GE Interlogix panels, hardwire smoke detectors connected to
Concord or SnapCard hardwire zones do not send restorals.
¾To turn Zone Restoral reporting off or on:
1. With the display showing ZONE RESTORALS OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Two Trip Error (06009) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
This setting works with the Alarm Verify setting (see “Alarm Verify” later in this sec-
tion and Appendix B: Table B1 “Sensor Table Characteristics”). If Alarm Verify is
on, then the panel waits for a second sensor trip before sending an alarm.
Note
For UL Listed installations, the Two Trip Error feature must be set to off.
If Two Trip Error is also on and a second sensor trip does not occur within a 4-minute
time period, then the panel sends an error report to the central monitoring station.
¾To turn Two Trip Error off or on:
1. With the display showing TWO
TRIP ERROR OFF/ON (current set-
ting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered set-
ting.
2. Press # and the display shows the
new setting.
Concord 46
TP Panic RPT FMT (06010) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
This setting determines how the panel formats touchpad panic alarm
reports to the central station.
When this feature is turned on, touchpad panic alarms report using
the following 3-digit codes:
Auxiliary—597, Police—598, Fire—599
When turned off, touchpad panic alarms report using a 3-digit code
from 500 to 515, with the last 2 digits identifying the touchpad device
number.
¾To turn TP Panic RPT FMT off or on:
1. With the display showing TP PANIC RPT FMT OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The
display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
AC Failure (06011) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel reports to the central station at a
random time between 15 and 45 minutes after AC power to the
panel is lost. Making the report random helps prevent systems in a
power outage affected area from trying to report at the same time.
Note
If this feature and the Aux Power Fail feature are both on, the panel also
monitors for and reports an AC failure for the SuperBus 2000 2-Amp
Power Supply.
Note
For UL Listed installations, AC Failure must be set to on.
¾To turn AC Failure reports off or on:
1. With the display showing AC FAILURE OFF/ON (current
setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes
the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Receiver Failure (06012) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel reports a receiver failure under the
following conditions:
• No wireless sensor signals have been received for two hours or
• The receiver is being jammed with a constant signal.
Note
For UL Listed installations using wireless devices, Receiver Failure must
be set to on.
¾To turn Receiver Failure reports off or on:
1. With the display showing RECEIVER FAILURE OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
RF Low Bat Rpt (06013) Reporting-Global (Default = weekly)
This setting determines whether the panel sends daily or weekly
low battery reports to the central monitoring station when a wireless
device is reporting a low battery condition to the panel.
¾To set RF Low Battery Report to daily or weekly:
1. With the display showing RF LOW BAT RPT DAILY/
WEEKLY (current setting), press 1 (daily) or 2
(weekly). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
RF Supv Report (06014) Reporting-Global (Default = weekly)
This setting determines whether the panel sends daily or weekly
reports to the central monitoring station when the panel detects a
supervisory condition in a wireless device.
¾To set RF Supv Report to daily or weekly:
1. With the display showing RF SUPV REPORT DAILY/
WEEKLY (current setting), press 1 (daily) or 2
(weekly). The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord
47
The following describes the settings that appear under REPORTING—PARTITION 1-6.
Swinger Limit (06015) Reporting-Global (Default = 1)
This setting determines the maximum number of times (1–2) a sensor or zone can go into
alarm (during a single arming period) before the panel automatically bypasses that sensor
or zone. This feature only applies to sensors or zones in groups 00–20, 29, 34, or 35.
When set to 1, the panel automatically bypasses a sensor or zone after it causes an alarm.
When set to 2, the panel waits until a sensor or zone has caused a second alarm (during the
same arming period) before bypassing it. At any setting, the automatic bypass is logged
into the event buffer.
A bypassed sensor or zone will be cleared (automatically unbypassed) if the system
receives no further activations from that sensor or zone over the next 48–50 hours.
Changing the arming level also clears all automatically bypassed sensors and zones and
resets the Swinger Limit count on all sensors and zones.
¾To set the Swinger Limit:
1. With the display showing
SWINGER LIMIT n (current
setting), press the desired
number (1–2). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display
shows the new setting.
Aux Power Fail (06016) Reporting-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel sends a report to the central mon-
itoring station if the 12 VDC power outputs on the panel and/or
SuperBus 2000 2-Amp Power Supply fail.
Note
If this feature is on and the AC Failure and Low CPU Battery features
are both on, the panel sends AC failure and low backup battery reports
for the SuperBus 2000 2-Amp Power Supply.
¾To turn Program Report on or off:
1. With the display showing AUX POWER FAIL ON/OFF
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Opening Reports (06100 - 06600) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel sends an opening report to the central
station after disarming the system.
Note
To use this feature, the Open/Close Reports settings under the PHONES
menu must be turned on for the specific CS Phone or Pager number.
¾To turn Opening Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing OPENING REPORTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Closing Reports (06101 - 06601) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel sends a closing report to the central
station after arming the system.
Note
To use this feature, the Open/Close Reports settings under the PHONES
menu must be turned on for the specific CS Phone or Pager number.
¾To turn Closing Reports off or on:
1. With the display showing CLOSING REPORTS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Recent Closings (06102 - 06602) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = on)
When this setting is on, the panel sends a recent closing report to the
central station if an alarm occurs within two minutes after the exit
delay time expires. Such a report is used to identify a possible exit
fault.
¾To turn Recent Closings off or on:
1. With the display showing RECENT CLOSINGS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord 48
No Activity (06103 - 06603) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel sends a no activity report to the cen-
tral station when the activity timeout expires (see TIMERS—ACTIVITY TIM-
EOUT).
¾To turn No Activity reports off or on:
1. With the display showing NO ACTIVITY OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Duress Option (06104 - 06604) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
(Default = off) When this setting is on, the system can be controlled
using a programmed duress code (see SECURITY—PARTITION N—DURESS
CODE) and will send a duress alarm to the central monitoring station.
Note
For UL Listed installations, Duress Option must be set to off.
Do not use a duress code unless it is absolutely necessary. Using duress
codes often results in false alarms due to code entry errors. If a duress
code is absolutely necessary, use it with the audio verification module
to reduce false alarms and accidental dispatches.
¾To turn Duress Option off or on:
1. With the display showing DURESS OFF/ON (cur-
rent setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Force Armed (06105 - 06605) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel reports to the central monitoring station when a
user “force arms” the system.
Note
Forced arming occurs if the user presses BYPASS when arming the system with open
sensors/zones protesting.
Auto-forced arming occurs when the user does not press BYPASS when arming the sys-
tem with open sensors/zones protesting, then leaves through an entry/exit door and the
arming protest period expires. This causes the system to automatically bypass the open
(protesting) sensors.
Auto-forced arming always reports to the central monitoring station.
¾To turn Force Armed off or on:
1. With the display showing FORCE
ARMED OFF/ON (current setting),
press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the
new setting.
Latchkey Format (06106 - 06606) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
(Default = off) This setting determines whether the selected partition is set up for
basic (off) or advanced (on) latchkey opening report operation.
Basic:
If the partition is armed by entering 2 (or 3) + CODE, disarming using a desig-
nated latchkey user code or keychain touchpad within an assigned time schedule
sends a page.
If the partition is armed by entering 2 (or 3) + CODE + 6 (Latchkey), disarming
using a designated latchkey user code or keychain touchpad inside or outside of
an assigned time schedule sends a page.
Advanced:
If the partition is armed by entering 2 (or 3) + CODE + 6 (Latchkey), disarming
using a latchkey designated user code or keychain touchpad within an assigned
time schedule sends a page.
Refer to the User’s Guide for complete Latchkey setup and operation.
¾To turn Latchkey Format off or on:
1. With the desired partition selected,
press A or B until the display shows
LATCHKEY FORMAT OFF/ON (current
setting).
2. Press 1 (off—basic) or 2 (on—
advanced). The display flashes the
entered setting. Press # and the dis-
play shows the new setting.
Concord
49
Freeze Alarm (06107 - 06607) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the panel reports a freeze alarm to the
central station or pager, when the selected partition’s energy saver mod-
ule or Dialog RF Thermostat detects a temperature that matches a pre-
determined setting (see BUS DEVICES—UNIT ID—ENERGY OPTIONS—
FREEZE TEMP, or FREEZE TEMP below).
¾To turn Freeze Alarm reporting off or on:
1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B
until the display shows FREEZE ALARM OFF/ON
(current setting).
2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the
entered setting. Press # and the display shows
the new setting.
Freeze Temp (06108 - 06608) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = 42°F)
This setting determines the temperature point the Energy Saver Module
or Dialog RF Thermostat detects a potential freeze (heating failure)
condition. The adjustable range is from 40° - 90° F.
Note
This is the same menu found under ACCESSORY MODULES/BUS
DEVICES/UNIT ID/ENERGY OPTIONS. The setting is used by both the
SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module and Dialog RF Thermostat. Individual
freeze temperature settings for each device are not allowed.
¾To set the Freeze Temp:
1. With the desired partition selected, press A or B
until the display shows FREEZE TEMP (current
setting).
2. Enter the desired temperature (40-90). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting. Press # and the
display shows the new setting.
Alarm Verify (06109 - 06609) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the panel reports to the central moni-
toring station after a single sensor or zone trip (off) or waits for a sec-
ond trip before reporting (on).
This setting affects sensors/zones in groups 10 through 20. If Alarm
Verify is set to on, group 18 responds the same as group 17 (see
“Appendix B, Table B1 “Sensor Group Characteristics”).
Note
For UL Listed installations, Alarm Verify must be set to off.
¾To turn Alarm Verify off or on:
1. With the display showing ALARM VERIFY OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
System Tamper (06110 - 06610) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
This setting determines how the panel handles possible tamper situations. When
this feature is on, the panel reacts in the following two ways:
• Initiates an alarm if several attempts are made to disarm the system with
incorrect access codes (40 consecutive keypresses).
• Reports to the central station if a bus device stops communicating with the
panel.
• Reports to the central monitoring station if a tamper condition occurs on
unarmed RF (wireless) devices.
Note
For UL Commercial Listed installations (UL 1610), System Tamper must be set to on.
¾To change the System Tamper setting:
1. With the display showing SYSTEM
TAMPER OFF/ON (current setting),
press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
setting.
Concord 50
Siren Options Menu
The SIREN OPTIONS menu lets you set up siren operation and supervision.
The following describes how to program the settings that appear under GLOBAL.
Report Confirm (06112 - 06612) Reporting-Partition 1-6 (Default = off)
When this setting is on, system status speakers announce “Report is okay” fol-
lowed by a single beep each time a successful report is made to the central moni-
toring station. When turned off, no status message or beep sounds.
¾To change the Report Confirm setting:
1. With the display showing REPORT
CONFIRM OFF/ON (current setting),
press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display
flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new
setting.
Immediate Beeps (0700) Siren Options-Global (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the panel activates trouble beeps as
soon as a wireless device supervisory condition is detected (on), or if
the panel waits 10 hours after the supervisory condition is detected to
activate trouble beeps (off). (Refer to TIMERS—GLOBAL—SUPERVI-
SORY TIME).
Note
For UL Listed installations, this feature must be on.
¾To turn Immediate Beeps off or on:
1. With the display showing IMMEDIATE BEEPS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Disable Trouble Beeps (0701) Siren Options-Global (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel does not initiate beeps to alert users
of wireless device supervisory trouble and does not protest on arming
if the condition exists.
Note
If Immediate Beeps is set to on, trouble beeps sound for supervisory trou-
ble conditions regardless of this menu setting.
Note
For UL Listed installations, Disable Trouble Beeps must be set to off.
¾To turn Disable Trouble Beeps off or on:
1. With the display showing DISABLE TR BEEPS
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
UL 98 Options (0702) Siren Options-Global (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the panel complies with UL 98
requirements (4-hour trouble beep restart, 4-hour backup battery test,
4-hour smoke (group 26) zone supervisory).
Note
For UL Listed installations, this feature must be on.
¾To turn UL 98 Options off or on:
1. With the display showing UL 98 OPTIONS OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Global Fire (0703) Siren Options-Global (Default = off)
This setting determines whether or not sirens in all partitions sound
(on) if any partition activates a fire alarm.
¾To turn Global Fire off or on:
1. With the display showing GLOBAL FIRE OFF/ON
(current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The dis-
play flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord
51
The following describes the settings that appear under SIREN OPTIONS—PARTITION 1.
Sensors Menu
The SENSORS menu gives you access to the following settings:
•LEARN SENSORS lets you add (learn) hardwire zones, wireless sensors, and wireless touch-
pads into panel memory.
•SENSOR TEXT lets you “name” the sensors and zones you have added to the system.
•DELETE SENSORS lets you delete zones and sensors from panel memory.
•EDIT SENSORS lets you view and, if desired, change a sensor group or partition assignment.
You can also identify whether a zone is wireless or hardwire, whether it is configured as
Normally Closed (N/C) or Normally Open (N/O), or if the zone is a touchpad.
Silent Panic (0704) Siren Options-Global (Default = off)
This setting determines whether touchpad police panic alarms are
audible (off) or silent (on).
¾To turn Silent Panic off or on:
1. With the display showing GLOBAL SILENT PANIC
OFF/ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Siren Verify (0710) Siren Options-Partition 1 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether or not the panel supervises the panel
speaker terminals (7–8). When this feature is on, the panel will indicate a
trouble condition if no speaker is connected to panel speaker terminals.
Note
For UL Listed installations, Siren Verify must be set to on.
¾To turn Siren Verify off or on:
1. With the display showing SIREN VERIFY OFF/
ON (current setting), press 1 (off) or 2 (on).
The display flashes the entered setting.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Table 6: How to Trip Sensors
Sensor Steps to Trip Sensor
Hardwire Zones
Start with the zone in its “normal” state, then trip the zone into
its alarm state. A normally closed door, for example, should be
closed when you begin the Learn Sensors process. To trip the
zone, open the door.
Wireless Sensors Follow the instructions included with each sensor.
Wireless Door/Window Sensors
with External Contacts
Place the external contact in the alarm condition, then activate
the sensor tamper switch.
Self Actuated Bell Activate the tamper switch.
Handheld Wireless Touchpads Press the BYPASS button.
Keychain Touchpads Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons together until the
touchpad LED flashes.
ELM Keychain Touchpads
1. Press and release the unlock button twice quickly, then
press and hold until the LED flashes three times.
2. Press and release the unlock button once quickly, then
press and hold until the LED flashes two times.
3. Press and hold the unlock button until the LED flashes
once.
Concord 52
The following describes how to program the sensor settings that appear under LEARN SENSORS.
Learn Sensors (080) Sensors (Default = none)
The following describes how to add (learn) hardwire
zones and wireless devices into panel memory.
Note
The panel comes with factory programmed onboard hard-
wire zones. Install 2k-ohm, end of line (EOL) resistors on all
unused factory programmed onboard hardwire zones. If you
don’t want to install EOL resistors, delete any unused zones
from memory. See Table 7 for onboard hardwire zone fac-
tory programming.
Sensors must be placed in a partition or sensor group. To
change the sensor group or partition assignment after add-
ing a sensor or zone, use the EDIT SENSORS menu.
¾To Learn Sensors into panel memory:
1. With the display showing SENSORS, press # and the display
shows LEARN SENSORS.
2. Press # and the display shows SENSOR PTN 1.
3. Press # to select partition 1 or press 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 + # to select
the desired partition. The display should show SENSOR GROUP
0.
4. Enter the desired sensor group + # (see Table B1 in “Appendix
B” for a description of all sensor group characteristics). The
display shows TRIP SENSOR nn, where nn is the displayed (next
available) sensor number.
5. To change the displayed sensor number, enter the desired sen-
sor number + #. The desired sensor number is displayed.
6. With the desired sensor number displayed, use the guidelines in
Table 6 to force the sensor or zone you are adding (learning)
into the panel memory to send a signal to the panel.
7. To add another sensor to the same sensor group and partition,
go back to step 5.
8. To add sensors to another sensor group or partition, press *
twice and go back to step 1 (LEARN SENSORS).
Table 7: Onboard Hardwire Zone Factory Programming
Zone Input Group No. & Description
1 10–Entry/Exit
2 17–Instant Interior Follower
3 13–Instant Perimeter
4 13–Instant Perimeter
5 13–Instant Perimeter
6 13–Instant Perimeter
7 13–Instant Perimeter
8 13–Instant Perimeter
Note
If the panel memory is cleared, all onboard hardwire zone factory programming will be erased.
Concord
53
Sensor Text (081) Sensors (Default = none)
Use the following guidelines to “name” zone and sensor loca-
tions:
• Use the item numbers that appear in Appendix B, Table B2
“Item Numbers and Sensor Text” for characters and words
listed there.
• If a desired word does not appear in Table B2, create it
using the characters (custom text).
• When using words from Table B2, spaces between them
appear automatically. When using characters from Table
B2 to create words, you must reserve an item number for a
‘space’ after the word.
• Each character or word uses up one item number. For
example, a word from the list counts as one item number.
A created word (such as BOY’S) counts as six item num-
bers—4 letters, 1 apostrophe, and 1 space.
• Only 16 item numbers are allowed for each zone or sensor
name, so plan ahead before programming sensor text. You
may need to abbreviate words to avoid running out of item
numbers.
¾To program Sensor Text:
1. Press A or B until the display shows SENSOR TEXT.
2. Press # and the display shows TEXT FOR SN 01.
3. Press A or B until the display shows the desired sensor
number (or enter the desired sensor number and press #).
4. Press # and the display shows: SN 1 ITEM 0 0 - ________.
Where ITEM 0 is the first character/word location and 0 is
the character/word number.
5. Enter the number of the desired character or word, or
scroll through the numbers by pressing B (forward) or A
(backward). If you make a mistake, simply enter the cor-
rect number or continue scrolling through choices.
6. Press # to accept the displayed choice and the display
shows: SN 1 ITEM 1 0 -.____
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed to complete the zone or
sensor name.
8. Press * after entering the last character or word number.
The display shows the complete text name. For example:
TEXT FOR SN 01 FRONT ENTRY DOOR
Delete Sensors (082) Sensors (Default = none)
The following procedure describes how to remove hardwire
zone and wireless sensor numbers from panel memory.
Note
Deleting sensors does not delete sensor text associated with the
deleted sensor number. To delete sensor text, enter the SENSOR
TEXT menu and enter 000 (nulls) for each item number.
¾To Delete Sensors from panel memory:
1. Press A or B until the display shows DELETE SENSORS.
2. Press # and the display shows DELETE SENSOR nn (lowest
zone/sensor number in panel memory).
3. Press # to delete the displayed sensor or—enter the
desired sensor number, then press #.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all desired sensors are deleted.
Edit Sensors (083) Sensors (Default = none)
This menu lets you view and, if desired,
change the group and partition assignment for
each learned zone or sensor. For example, the
display shows: S01 P1 G13 NC HW BACK DOOR.
Where: S01 = zone/sensor number, P1 = parti-
tion 1, G13 = sensor group 13, NC = normally
closed, HW = hardwired, and BACK DOOR is the
programmed text name.
Other description codes include, RF = wireless
sensor, TP = touchpad, NO = normally open.
¾To Edit Sensors:
1. Press A or B until the display shows EDIT SENSORS.
2. Press # and the display shows the sensor or zone with the lowest number.
3. Press A or B to scroll through all learned zones and sensors.
4. When the desired zone or sensor is displayed, press #. The display shows
SENSOR PTN n (current partition assignment).
5. Enter the desired partition number, then press #. The display shows the
new partition assignment.
6. Press A or B and the display shows SENSOR GROUP nn (current group
assignment).
7. Enter the desired group number, then press #. The display shows the new
group assignment.
Concord 54
Audio Verification Menu
The AUDIO VERIFICATION menu lets you set up the audio verification module (AVM) operation in
partition 1. If you want audio verification for partitions 2-6, you must install a “stand-alone”
audio verification module and a 4-Relay Output Module (HOM) (60-770) output for that parti-
tion.
The following describes the Audio Verification settings that appear under PARTITION 1.
Audio Verify (09000) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether or not the
system can be accessed by phone for alarm
verification.
¾To turn Audio Verification off or on:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFICATION, press #. The display shows
PARTITION 1.
2. Press # again and the display shows AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON (current setting).
3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the
display shows the new setting.
Audio Mode (09001) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = 1)
This setting determines how the audio verification module operates. Choose
one of the following:
•(1) Instant—Allows the central station operator instant access for an
audio session by entering the AVM code or by pressing * (if an AVM
access code is not programmed) upon completion of panel alarm report
(also see ACCESS TIMEOUT).
•(2) Callback—Allows the central station operator to place a call to the
premises within 5 minutes of the alarm report (panel picks up after one
ring). The operator must press * or enter the AVM access code within 20
seconds after ring. The panel does not report any alarms during the AVM
session, except for fire alarms.
•(3) Callback Silent—Same as Callback, except premises phones do not
ring.
¾To set Audio Mode:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY
OFF/ON, press A or B until the display
shows AUDIO MODE nn (current setting).
2. Enter the desired mode number (1–3). The
display flashes the entered setting. Press #
and the display shows the new setting.
Fire Shutdown (09002) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether system sirens turn
off during a fire alarm audio session.
¾To turn Fire Shutdown off or on:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows FIRE SHUTDOWN OFF/ON (current setting).
2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press
# and the display shows the new setting.
Silent Talkback (09003) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the central station
operator can speak to persons on the premises (on)
or only listen (off) during a silent or duress alarm
audio session.
¾To turn Silent Talkback off or on:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows SILENT TALKBACK OFF/ON (current setting).
2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press #
and the display shows the new setting.
Concord
55
Access Timeout (09004) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = 90 sec.)
If the Audio Mode is set to “Instant,” then this set-
ting determines how much time (30–300s, in 2-sec-
ond increments) the central station operator has to
enter the AVM access code after the panel is
accessed for an audio session.
¾To change the Access Timeout:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows ACCESS TIMEOUT nn SECS (current setting).
2. Enter the desired time. The display flashes the entered setting. Press #
and the display shows the new setting.
Beep Delay (09005) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = 02 sec.)
This setting determines how long AVM access
beeps are delayed (0–300s, in 2-second intervals) at
the beginning of a 2-way audio session.
¾To change the Beep Delay:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows BEEP DELAY nn SECS (current setting).
2. Enter the desired time. The display flashes the entered setting. Press
# and the display shows the new setting.
Access Code (09006) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = **** or none)
This setting determines the code required to access
the audio verification module to start an audio ses-
sion. If no code is programmed, pressing * starts an
audio session.
¾To change the Access Code:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows ACCESS CODE nnnn (current code).
2. Enter the desired 4-digit access code. The display flashes the
entered code. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
¾To delete an Access Code:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows ACCESS CODE nnnn (current code).
2. Press D to delete.
Vox Mic Gain (09007) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = 14)
This setting determines the microphone sensitivity
for triggering voice-activated switching (VOX).
For the Interrogator 200, the default setting (14) is
recommended.
Room size, acoustics and furnishings where the
Interrogator 200 is located will influence the set-
ting. Setting range is from 01 (low) to 64 (high).
¾To change the Vox Mic Gain:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows VOX MIC GAIN nn (current setting).
2. Enter the desired 2-digit setting (01 - 64). The display flashes the
entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Vox Gain Range (09008) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = 64)
This setting determines the gain range for voice-
activated switching (VOX).
Setting range is from 01 (low) to 64 (high). For best
results, this setting should be higher than the Vox
Mic Gain.
¾To change the Vox Gain Range:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows VOX GAIN RANGE nn (current setting).
2. Enter the desired 2-digit setting (01 - 64). The display flashes the
entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Manual Mic Gain (09009) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = 64)
Not field programmable at this time.
Concord 56
Accessory Modules Menu
The ACCESSORY MODULES menu gives you access to the following menus:
•BUS DEVICES—this menu lets you read bus device unit numbers, assign bus devices to a par-
tition, and configure other features associated with a specific bus device.
•SNAPCARDS—this menu lets you set the configuration number for each SnapCard output,
assign SnapCard outputs to a partition, and name the SnapCard outputs.
The following describes how to program the settings that appear under ACCESSORY MODULES—
BUS DEVICES.
Vox RX Gain(09010) Audio Verification-Partition 1 (Default = 04)
This setting determines the receiver (talkback) gain
level for voice-activated switching (VOX). Setting
range is 01-10.
If the VOX is switching the speaker on when the
central station operator is not talking, lower this
setting and the VOX Mic Gain setting.
If the VOX is not switching the speaker on when
the central station operator is talking, raise this set-
ting and lower the VOX Mic Gain setting.
¾To change the VOX RX Gain:
1. With the display showing AUDIO VERIFY OFF/ON, press A or B until
the display shows VOX RX GAIN nn (current setting).
2. Enter the desired 2-digit setting (01 - 10). The display flashes the
entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Unit-ID (10000 thru 10015) Acc. Modules-Bus Devices (Default = **** or none)
This menu lets you identify all connected bus
devices, view each Unit Number, view the Device
ID number, and configure other settings based on a
specific device. This menu also lets you delete
learned bus devices.
Note
Most settings under ACCESSORY MODULES—BUS
DEVICES have no shortcut numbers.
To help identify bus devices, the 8-digit Device ID
number is also located on a label on each Super-
Bus 2000 device.
¾To identify bus device Unit and ID:
1. With the display showing BUS DEVICES, press #. The display shows
the bus Unit Number and the 8-digit Device ID number. For exam-
ple: UNIT - ID 0—02110185. Where 0 is the Unit Number and 02110185
is the Device ID number.
2. Press A or B to identify all other bus Unit Numbers (0–15) and
Device ID numbers.
¾To delete learned Unit Numbers:
1. With the display showing BUS DEVICES, press #. The display shows
the bus device set to Unit Number 0.
2. Press A or B until the bus device Unit Number you want to delete is
displayed.
3. Press D. The display changes the Unit Number to NONE.
Device ID Acc. Modules-Bus Devices-Unit ID-Change ID (Default = none)
This menu lets you change the bus
device ID number when replacing
a defective bus device.
¾To change a Device ID:
1. With the display showing the desired bus device, press # + #. The display shows
DEVICE ID (current ID).
2. Enter the ID of the new bus device. The display flashes the entered selection. Press #
and the display shows the new setting.
3. Exit programming mode.
4. Remove AC and battery power from the panel.
5. Replace the defective bus device with a new one.
6. Apply AC and battery power to the panel.
Concord
57
Partition Assign Acc. Modules-Bus Devices-Unit ID-Device Partition
This menu lets you assign bus devices to work
in the desired partition.
Note
SuperBus 2000 8Z Input Modules, SuperBus 2000
4-Relay Output Modules, and SuperBus 2000 RF
Receivers are not assigned to partitions.
¾To assign bus devices to partitions:
1. With the display showing the desired bus device, press #.
2. Press A or B until the display shows DEVICE PTN and then press #. The
display shows PARTITION ASSIGN n.
3. Press 1-6 to select the desired partition. The display flashes the entered
selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Output Programming Acc. Modules-Unit ID-Outputs
Use these settings to program the output
points of any installed SuperBus 2000
Hardwire Output Module. The installer
programs a HOM output point into the
Concord security panel by entering three
kinds of information.
•Partition -the system partition (1-6).
•Trigger - the event that activates the
output point. Trigger events can be
partition alarms, trouble conditions,
open sensors, etc. (see Appendix B:
Reference Tables).
•Response - how the output responds
when trigger event occurs (see
Appendix B: Reference Tables).
Below describes how to program each of the HOM output point configurations
into the security panel. The point configuration number is tttrr, where ttt is the
trigger number and rr is the response number.
Note
HOM output points cannot be configured for user control. Only the onboard and Snap-
Card outputs can be configured for user control.
1. With the display showing the desired bus device, press #.
2. Press A or B until the display shows OUTPUTS.
3. Press #. The display shows OUTPUT 1.
4. Press A or B to select an output, then press #. The display shows PARTITION
ASSIGN 1.
5. Press 1-6 to select the desired partition assignment for this relay. The display
flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
6. Press A or B. The display shows CONFIGURATION tttrr (current setting).
7. Enter the desired 5-digit configuration number for this relay. The display
flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
8. Press # and repeat steps 4 through 8 until all outputs are programmed
Status Beeps Acc. Modules-Bus Devices-Unit ID-Keypad Options
(Default = on)
This setting determines whether or not the selected touchpad
sounds status beeps. Each touchpad can be set individually.
This feature is usually turned off for a touchpad that is
located in or near bedrooms, to avoid disturbing sleeping per-
sons.
Note
For UL Listed installations, Status Beeps must be set to on.
¾To turn touchpad Status Beeps on or off:
1. With the display showing the desired touchpad, press #
then A or B until the display shows KEYPAD OPTIONS.
2. Press # and the display shows STATUS BEEPS OFF/ON (cur-
rent setting).
3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on) to select the desired setting. The dis-
play flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display
shows the new setting.
Key Beeps Acc. Modules-Bus Devices-Unit ID-Keypad Options
(Default = on)
This setting determines whether or not selected touchpads
beep when their buttons are pressed.
This feature is usually turned off for a touchpad that is
located in or near bedrooms, to avoid disturbing sleeping per-
sons.
¾To turn Key Beeps on or off:
1. With the display showing the desired touchpad, press #
then A or B until the display shows KEYPAD OPTIONS.
Next, press # then A or B until the display shows KEY
BEEPS OFF/ON (current setting).
2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on) to select the desired setting. The dis-
play flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display
shows the new setting.
Concord 58
The following describes how to program the settings that appear under SNAPCARDS.
Freeze Temp Acc. Modules-Bus Devices-Unit ID-Energy Options
(Default = 42°F)
This setting determines the temperature point that the Energy
Saver Module detects a potential freeze (heating failure) con-
dition. The adjustable range is from 40° to 90°F.
Note
This is the same menu found under REPORTING/PARTITIONS
1-6. The setting is used by both the SuperBus 2000 Energy
Saver Module and Dialog RF Thermostat. Individual freeze tem-
perature settings for each device are not allowed.
¾To change the Freeze Temp setting:
1. With the display showing the desired bus device press #,
then A or B until the display shows ENERGY OPTIONS.
Next, press # then A or B until the display shows FREEZE
TEMP nn DEGREES (current setting).
2. Enter the desired freeze temperature (40°–90° F). The dis-
play flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display
shows the new setting.
Temperature Acc. Modules-Bus Devices-Unit ID-Energy Options
(Default = none)
This setting lets you adjust the Energy Saver Module (ESM)
room temperature setting to match the premises thermostat.
The adjustable range is from 40°–90°F.
Note
To ensure accuracy, wait at least 15 minutes before setting the
ESM temperature to allow the ESM to warm or cool to actual
room temperature.
¾To change the ESM Temperature setting:
1. With the display showing the desired bus device press #,
then A or B until the display shows ENERGY OPTIONS.
Next, press # and then A or B until the display shows TEM-
PERATURE nn DEGREES (current setting).
2. Enter the desired temperature (40°–90° F). The display
flashes the entered selection. Press # and the display shows
the new setting.
Cellular System Acc. Modules-Bus Devices-Unit ID-Cellular Options
(Default = B)
This setting determines the cellular transmission system (A
or B) used for cellular communication. This information is
provided by the cellular provider based on installation ZIP
code.
¾To set the Cellular System:
1. With the display showing the desired bus device press 1,
(B) or 2 (A). The display flashes the entered selection.
2. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Output Programming (output 1: partition
assign-101100, configuration-101101; out-
put 2: partition assign-101110, configuration-
101111; output 3: partition assign-101120,
configuration-101121; output 4: partition
assign-101130, configuration-101131)
Acc. Modules-SnapCards-Output Programming
(Defaults: Partition Assign=1, Configuration Output 1= 01400,
Output 2 = 00410, Output 3 = 00903, Output 4 = 01003)
This setting lets you assign a partition and a 5-digit
configuration number for each SnapCard relay out-
put. This number determines both which system event
activates the output and the duration or time the out-
put is activated.
1. Assign the partition (1-6).
2. Assign the configuration number (combination
of a trigger number and a response number.
Trigger: the event that activates the output point.
Trigger events can be partition alarms, trouble
conditions, open sensors, etc. (see Appendix B:
Reference Tables).
Response: how the output responds when trigger
event occurs (see Appendix B: Reference
Tables).
¾To assign configuration numbers to SnapCard Relay outputs
(where tttrr is the point configuration number, ttt is the trigger
number and rr is the response number):
1. With the display showing SNAPCARDS, press #. Then press A or B
until the display shows OUTPUT PROGRAMMING.
2. Press # again and the display shows OUTPUT 1.
3. Press A or B to select the desired output (1–4), then press #.
4. With the display showing PARTITION ASSIGN 1, press 1-6 to select
the desired partition. Press # to confirm the partition.
5. Press A or B until the display shows CONFIGURATION tttrr (current
setting).
6. Enter the desired 5-digit configuration number for this relay. Press
# to confirm the setting.
7. Press # and repeat steps 3 through 6 until all outputs are pro-
grammed.
Concord
59
Onboard Options Menu
The ONBOARD OPTIONS menu lets you set up the following built-in options:
•INPUTS—This menu lets you turn the Smoke Verification and the Two Wire Smoke features
off or on.
•OUTPUT PROGRAMMING—This menu lets you set configuration numbers for the two built-in
panel outputs and assign the outputs to partitions.
•OUTPUT TEXT—This menu lets you assign text to the two built-in outputs so they can be con-
trolled by the user.
The following sections describe the settings that appear under ONBOARD OPTIONS—INPUTS.
Output Text (output 1: 10120, output 2: 10121, out-
put 3: 10122, output 4: 10123)
Acc. Modules-SnapCards-Output Text (Default = none)
Entering text for an output allows the user to control it directly
or by schedule. Use the following guidelines to “name” Snap-
Card outputs:
• Use the item numbers that appear in “Appendix B, Table
B2” for characters and words listed there.
Note
If you desire an output for User Output Control you must use the
Output Text feature to name the output. If no Output Text is pro-
grammed, the user will not have access to the output.
• If a desired word does not appear in Table B2, create it
using the characters (custom text).
• When using words from Table B2, spaces between them
appear automatically. When using characters from Table B2
to create words, you must reserve an item number for a
‘space’ after the word.
• Each character or word uses up one item number. For exam-
ple, a word from the list counts as one item number. A cre-
ated word (such as BOY’S) counts as six item numbers—4
letters, 1 apostrophe, and 1 space.
• Only 16 item numbers are allowed for each output name, so
plan ahead before programming output text. You may need
to abbreviate words to avoid running out of item numbers.
¾To program Output Text:
1. With the display showing SNAPCARDS, press #, then A
or B until the display shows OUTPUT TEXT.
2. Press # and the display shows OUTPUT 1.
3. Press A or B until the desired output number is dis-
played.
4. Press # and the display shows: OUTPUT N ITEM 0 0 -
.Where ITEM 0 is the first character/word location and 0
is the character/word number.
5. Enter the number of the desired character or word, or scroll
through the numbers by pressing B (forward) or A (back-
ward). If you make a mistake, simply enter the correct
number or continue scrolling through choices.
6. Press # to accept the displayed choice and the display
shows: OUTPUT N ITEM 1 0 -.
7. Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed to complete the output
name.
8. Press * after entering the last character or word number.
The display shows the complete text name. For example:
OUTPUT 1 GARAGE DOOR.
Smoke Verify (1100) Onboard Options-Inputs (Default = off)
This setting controls the number of sensor group 26 (fire) zone
trips needed to report a fire alarm.
•Hardwire Smokes: will determine whether or not the panel
requires two alarm signals within five minutes (on) from 2-
wire smoke detectors connected to panel zone input 8 and/or
SnapCard zone inputs or any other hardwire zone learned
into group 26 (fire) before activating system sirens and
reporting to a central station (or pager).
•Wireless Smokes: the first trip of a group 26 RF sensor will
cause a local fire alarm. The second trip of any group 26
zone within the siren timeout will cause that fire alarm to be
reported to the central station.
Note
RF smoke detectors repeat the alarm transmission every 60 sec-
onds as long as they are detecting smoke. This repeated transmis-
sion will serve as the second zone trip, causing the alarm to be
reported.
¾To turn Smoke Verify off or on:
1. With the display showing ONBOARD OPTIONS, press #
twice. The display shows SMOKE VERIFY OFF/ON (cur-
rent setting).
2. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered
number.
3. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Note
For California State Fire Marshall Listed installations, this feature
must be off.
Concord 60
The following sections describe the settings that appear under ONBOARD OPTIONS—OUTPUT PRO-
GRAMMING
.
Two Wire Smoke (1101) Onboard Options-Inputs (Default = off)
This setting determines how onboard hardwire zone 8
is configured. When this setting is on, zone 8 will be
configured for two wire smoke detectors. When off, it
will be configured for a normal hardwire input.
¾To turn Two Wire Smoke off or on:
1. With the display showing ONBOARD OPTIONS, press # twice. The
display shows SMOKE VERIFY OFF/ON (current setting).
2. Press A or B until the display shows TWO WIRE SMOKE ON/OFF
(current setting).
3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered number.
Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Output 1, 2 (Output 1: partition assign-11100,
configuration-11101; Output 2: partition assign-
11110, configuration-11111)
Onboard Options-Output-Programming
(Defaults: Output 1=Ptn 1, 01614; Output 2=Ptn 1, 01710)
This setting lets you assign the partition and the 5-digit
configuration number for the two onboard outputs. The
configuration number determines
• which system event activates the selected output, and
• the duration or time the output is activated.
The first three digits represent the trigger number of an
event (such as triggering an alarm, opening a sensor, or
arming the system). The last two digits represent how the
output responds (such as momentary switching, main-
tained (or latched) switching, or switching for a preset
time).
Note
If you want to configure an output for user Output Control you
must use the Output Text feature to name the output. If no Out-
put Text is programmed, user Output Control will not function
for that output.
Use the system event trigger and response numbers listed
in Appendix B: Reference Tables.
¾To set up onboard Output 1 & 2 partition and configuration
assignments:
1. With the display showing ONBOARD OPTIONS, press # + B.
The display shows OUTPUT PROGRAMMING.
2. Press # and the display shows OUTPUT 1. Press B to select
OUTPUT 2.
3. Press # and the display shows PARTITION ASSIGN n (current
setting).
4. Press 1-6 to assign the output to the desired partition, then
press #. The display shows PARTITION ASSIGN (new setting).
5. Press B and the display shows CONFIGURATION tttrr (current
setting).
6. Enter the desired configuration number. The display flashes
the entered number. Press # and the display shows the new
setting.
7. Press # and repeat steps 2 through 6 until all outputs are pro-
grammed.
Concord
61
Macro Keys Menu
The MACRO KEYS menu lets you set up single-button system commands with the ATP2100 and
ATP2600 touchpads.
The following describes how to program the settings that appear under PARTITION 1-6.
Output Text (Output 1: 1120, Output 2: 1121) Onboard Options-Output Text-Output 1, 2 (Default = none)
Entering text for an output allows the user to control it
directly or by schedule. Use the following guidelines to
“name” onboard outputs:
• Use the item numbers listed in “Appendix B, Table
B2” for characters and words.
Note
If you want to configure an output for user Output Control you
must use the Output Text feature to name the output. If no Out-
put Text is programmed, Output Control will not function for
that output.
• If a desired word does not appear in Table B2, create it
using the characters (custom text).
• When using words from Table B2, spaces between
them appear automatically. When using characters
from Table B2 to create words, you must reserve an
item number for a ‘space’ after the word.
• Each character or word uses up one item number. For
example, a word from the list counts as one item num-
ber. A created word (such as BOY’S) counts as six
item numbers—4 letters, 1 apostrophe, and 1 space.
• Only 16 item numbers are allowed for each output
name, so plan ahead before programming output text.
You may need to abbreviate words to avoid running
out of item numbers.
¾To program Output Text:
1. With the display showing ONBOARD OPTIONS, press # then
press B twice and the display shows OUTPUT TEXT.
2. Press # and the display shows OUTPUT 1.
3. Press # and the display shows: OUTPUT 1 ITEM 0 0 -. Where
ITEM 0 is the first character or word location and 0 is the
character or word number.
4. Enter the number of the desired character or word, or scroll
through the numbers by pressing B (forward) or A (back-
ward). If you make a mistake, simply enter the correct num-
ber or continue scrolling through choices.
5. Press # to accept the displayed choice and the display shows:
OUTPUT 1 ITEM 1 0 -.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed to complete the output name.
7. Press * after entering the last character or word number. The
display shows the complete text name. For example: OUT-
PUT 1 GARAGE DOOR.
Macro Keys Macro Keys (Defaults for all partitions:
Macro Key 1—Chime: 71
Macro Key 2—Stay: 2
Macro Key 3—Quick Exit: D;
Macro Key 4—Away: 3)
This menu lets you program the Chime, Stay, Exit, and Away macro keys on
ATP2100 and ATP2600 touchpads. Macro keys let you perform a system com-
mand with one button, eliminating manual entry of the command. For example,
the Stay key can be programmed so that it automatically arms the system to level
2 with No Delay just by pressing it once.
• Each partition can accept up to four macros.
• All touchpads in a partition use the same set of macros.
• Macro keys can execute a system command up to 14 keypresses in length.
Use keys 0-9, #, *, and A-F to program macros.
Note
It is recommended not to program macros that disarm the system.
• Panic keys, long keypresses (press and hold), and macro keys themselves
cannot be used in a macro.
• When programming a macro to enter user programming, two delays (F key)
must be entered after the access code, and before any shortcut number. For
example, the macro key sequence for entering the Set Time menu would be
9CODEFF020.
• When using an ATP2100 or ATP2600 to jump to another partition, pressing
the macro buttons on the “jumped” touchpad will execute macro commands
based on the macros programmed in the jumped partition.
¾To program/change a Macro Key:
1. With the display showing MACRO
KEYS, press #. The display shows PA R -
TITION 1.
2. Press A or B to select the desired par-
tition (1-6), then press #. The display
shows MACRO KEY 1 (current setting).
3. Press A or B to select the desired
macro key you want to program (1-4).
4. To change this macro, press the asso-
ciated macro key. The current setting
disappears and is replaced with a
flashing cursor.
5. Enter the desired system command.
The display flashes the entry.
Note
If you make a mistake, press the macro key
twice to clear the entry and start over.
6. Press the macro key again to accept
the entered command. The display
stops flashing.
Concord 62
Exiting Programming Mode
After all installer/dealer programming is completed, use the following procedure to exit program-
ming mode.
¾To exit programming mode:
1. Press * until the display shows SYSTEM PROGRAMMING.
2. Press A or B until the display shows EXIT PROGRAMMING READY.
3. Press # and the touchpad displays the TIME AND DATE.
Entering Quick Programming Mode
The Quick Programming Mode allows basic system programming using a SuperBus 2000 Fixed
Display Touchpad or any SuperBus 2000 Alphanumeric Touchpad. The following menus are
accessible:
• Account Number (all partitions)
• CS Phone 1
• CS Phone 2
• CS Phone 3
• Learn Sensors—limited to selecting sensor number, sensor group, and partition assignment.
An alphanumeric touchpad is required for programming sensor text in standard program-
ming mode.
¾To enter Quick Programming Mode:
1. Make sure the system is disarmed in all partitions.
2. Press 8 + installer/dealer CODE + 03. The display shows ACCOUNT NUMBER.
3. Cycle through the menus as shown below:
Entering User Programming Mode
The user programming mode lets you view system version information and program the follow-
ing system settings:
• Time and Date
• User Codes
• Options
•Set Up Schedules
• Attach Schedules to Events
• Energy Saver
• Attach Lights to Sensors
• System Version
You can enter user programming from an alphanumeric or fixed display touchpad by using the
system or partition master code. The default system master code is 1234.
¾To enter user-programming mode:
Press 9 + CODE. The display shows TIME AND DATE.
ACCOUNT
NUMBER
B
ACS PHONE B
A
LEARN
SENSOR
B
A
END PRO-
GRAMMING
#
#####
Partition n
1 -6
CS Phone 1 B
A
CS Phone 2 B
A
CS Phone 3 Sensor Partition n
1 -6
#####
Acct. Number
00000
CS Phone
None
CS Phone
None
CS Phone
None
Sensor Group
0
#
Trip Sensor n
1-96
Concord
63
Time and Date Menu
Note
Setting the time and date is
important for accurate track-
ing of system events stored
in the event buffer.
The panel uses a global clock and calendar for time and date. Alphanumeric touchpads display
the panel time and date whenever the system is disarmed.
The TIME AND DATE menu lets you set this clock and calendar. The following procedures tell you
how.
User Codes Menu
The USER CODES menu lets you program/change regular user access codes, partition master
codes, and the system master code. You can enter up to 230 separate user codes, allowing up to
230 different “users” access to the security system. You can also specify whether or not a specific
user is able to perform specific actions like, bypass sensors or test the system.
Time (020) Time and Date (Default = 00:00)
This setting lets you adjust the panel clock to the cor-
rect time. The panel uses a 24-hour clock. For exam-
ple, to set the time to 4:17 P.M., enter 1617.
¾To set the Time:
1. With the display showing TIME AND DATE, press # and the display
shows TIME hh:mm (current time).
2. Enter the correct time (0000–2359). The display flashes the
entered time. Press # and the display shows the new time.
Date (021) Time and Date (Default = 01/01/00)
This setting lets you adjust the panel calendar to
the correct month, day, and year.
¾To set the Date:
1. With the display showing TIME AND DATE, press #, then A or B until
the display shows DATE nn/nn/nn (current date).
2. Enter the correct month (01–12), day (01–31), and year (00–99). For
example, enter 090100 for September 1, 2000. The display flashes
the entered date. Press # and the display shows the new date.
User NNN (030nnn0 where
nnn=user number 00-229)
User Codes-Reg. User Codes-User NNN (Default = none)
User codes perform basic arming
and disarming functions. The sys-
tem allows up to 230 user codes
(user numbers 00–229). User
numbers that show **** indicate
no code is currently programmed
for that user number.
¾To program Regular User Codes:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display shows REGULAR USER
CODES.
2. Press # and the display shows USER nnn (first available user number).
3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows USER
nnn - nnnn.
4. With the desired user number displayed, enter a 4-digit user code. The display flashes
the entered code. Press # and the display shows USER nnn - nnnn (new code).
¾To delete Regular User Codes:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display shows REGULAR USER
CODES.
2. Press # and the display shows USER nnn - nnnn (first available user number).
3. Press A or B to select the desired user number/user code you want to delete (if it is not
already displayed), then press #. The display shows USER nnn - nnnn.
4. Enter the system or partition master code. The display flashes the entered code. Press
# and the display shows USER nnn -- **** (no code).
Concord 64
Direct Bypassing
(030nnn1 where nnn=user
number 00-229)
User Codes-Reg. User Codes-User NNN (Default = off)
This setting determines whether a
specific user code provides access
to the “bypass sensors” feature.
Set this feature to “on” for all
users who need to be able to
bypass sensors.
¾To turn user code Direct Bypassing off or on:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display shows REGULAR USER
CODES.
2. Press # and the display shows USER nnn (first available user number).
3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows USER
nnn - nnnn.
4. Press A or B until the display shows DIRECT BYPASSING OFF/ON (current setting).
5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display
shows the new setting.
Remote Access
(030nnn2 where nnn=user
number 00-229)
User Codes-Reg. User Codes-User NNN (Default = off)
This setting determines whether
the user can access the panel from
a remote phone (a phone located
off the premises).
¾To turn user code Remote Access off or on:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display shows REGULAR USER
CODES.
2. Press # and the display shows USER nn (first available user number).
3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows USER
nnn - nnnn.
4. Press B until the display shows REMOTE ACCESS ON/OFF (current setting).
5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display
shows the new setting.
System Tests
(030nnn3 where nnn=user
number 00-229)
User Codes-Reg. User Codes-User NNN (Default = off)
This setting determines whether a
specific user code provides access
to the phone and sensor tests. Set
this feature to “on” for all users
who need to be able to conduct
phone and sensor tests.
¾To turn user code System Tests off or on:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display shows REGULAR USER
CODES.
2. Press # and the display shows USER nnn (first available user number).
3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows USER
nnn - nnnn.
4. Press A or B until the display shows SYSTEM TESTS OFF/ON (current setting).
5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display
shows the new setting.
Latchkey Report
(030nnn4 where nnn=user
number 00-229)
User Codes-Reg. User Codes-User NNN (Defaults: 00-05 = on, 06-229 = off)
This setting determines whether
the user code causes a latchkey
report to be sent to a pager when
the code is used to change arming
levels.
¾To assign the Latchkey Report attribute to user codes:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display shows REGULAR USER
CODES.
2. Press # and the display shows USER nnn (first available user number).
3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The display shows USER
nnn - nnnn.
4. Press A or B until the display shows LATCHKEY OFF/ON (current setting).
5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered setting. Press # and the display
shows the new setting.
Concord
65
Options Menu
The OPTIONS menu lets you set up the system for downloading and silent arming. You can also
adjust alphanumeric touchpad display brightness from this menu.
Partition Assign (030nnn5 where nnn=user
number 00-229)
User Codes-Reg. User Codes-User NNN (Default = Ptn 1)
This setting determines which partitions a user code can
access. A code can be assigned to all partitions if
desired, making it usable at any touchpad in any parti-
tion and able to jump to any selected partition.
¾To assign Partitions to a user code:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # and the display
shows REGULAR USER CODES.
2. Press # and the display shows USER nnn (first available user
number).
3. Press A or B to select the desired user number, then press #. The
display shows USER nnn - nnnn.
4. Press A or B until the display shows PARTITION ASSIGN (current
setting).
5. Enter the desired partitions (1-6). The display flashes the
entered numbers. Press # and the numbers stop flashing.
Partition Master (0310 - 0315)User Codes-Partition Master Code (Default = none)
The Partition Master Code provides access to all system
operations and user programming for a single partition.
Note
You must be “in” the partition of the partition master code
you wish to change.
¾To change the Partition Master Code:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # then A or B
until the display shows PARTITION MASTER CODE.
2. Press # and the display shows PARTITION nnnn (current code).
3. Enter a new 4-digit code. The display flashes the entered code.
Press # and the display shows the new code.
System Master (0320) User Codes-System Master Code (Default = 1234)
The System Master Code provides
access to all system operations and user
programming.
¾To change the System Master Code:
1. With the display showing USER CODES, press # then A or B until the display
shows SYSTEM MASTER CODE.
2. Press # and the display shows SYSTEM MASTER nnnn (current code).
3. Enter a new 4-digit code. The display flashes the entered code. Press # and dis-
play shows the new code.
Downloading (041) Options (Default = on)
When this setting is on, the panel can communicate with Enter-
prise Downloader software for programming the system from
off-site.
Note
For this feature to work, the panel must be connected to a phone line
and be programmed with REMOTE ACCESS on, with a Downloader
phone number, and with a Downloader code.
¾To turn Downloading off or on:
1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
2. Press #, then A or B until the display shows DOWN-
LOADING OFF/ON (current setting).
3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered
selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Silent Arming (042) Options (Default = off)
This setting determines whether the panel sounds status beeps
from sirens and the touchpad when the system is armed.
Note
When this feature is on, the user does not need to press 5 (SILENT)
before arming the system to prevent status sounds. When SIA False
Alarm Reduction (0004) is ON, this option is not available.
¾To turn Silent Arming off or on:
1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
2. Press #, then A or B until the display shows SILENT
ARMING OFF/ON (current setting).
3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered
selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord 66
Set Up Schedules Menu
The SET UP SCHEDULES menu lets you set up time frames for light control, output control, auto-
matic arming, latchkey times, and exception opening/closing reports. The system (all partitions)
allows you to set up to 16 schedules (00–15) which are shared by all partitions.
Setting up schedules consists of setting a start and stop time for each schedule, then selecting
which days of the week the schedule will be active. You can also set up a rollover schedule,
which starts on one day and ends on another day. This saves programming time and leaves more
schedules available (in case they are needed later).
Rollover Schedule Example: To set up a schedule to rollover from Tuesday evening to Wednes-
day morning, set a schedule start time for 2200 (10:00 P.M.) and a stop time for 0500 (5:00 A.M.).
Set the schedule to turn on Tuesday. Because the stop time is set for morning, the system auto-
matically carries the schedule over to the next day.
If you use the same start and stop times described above and set the schedule to turn on Monday
through Friday, then one schedule will cover the entire week.
Touchpad Brightness (043) Options (Default = 2)
This setting lets the user lighten or darken the background on
touchpad displays. Each touchpad can be set to compensate for
lighting conditions in the touchpad location.
¾To adjust Touchpad Brightness:
1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
2. Press #, then A or B until the display shows TOUCHPAD
BRIGHTNESS n (current setting).
3. Enter a setting from 0 (darkest background) to 3 (brightest
background). The display flashes the entered selection.
Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Volume (044) Options (Default = 4)
This setting determines the volume level of status
sounds from speakers connected to the Phone Interface/
Voice Module.
Note
This menu appears only if a Phone Interface/Voice Module
is connected to the panel.
¾To adjust status sound Volume:
1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS, then press #.
2. Next, press A or B until the display shows VOLUME n (current
setting).
3. Enter a setting from 0 (off) to 7 (loudest). The display flashes the
entered selection. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Voice Chime (045) Options (Default = on)
This setting determines whether speakers connected to
the Phone Interface/Voice Module announce perimeter
sensor/zone numbers that are tripped when the Chime
feature is on. For example, “Sensor one open.”
Note
This menu appears only if a Phone Interface/Voice Module
is connected to the panel.
¾To turn Voice Chime off or on:
1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
2. Press # then A or B until the display shows VOICE CHIME OFF/
ON (current setting).
3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection.
Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Chime On Close (046) Options (Default = off)
When this setting is on, the panel sounds a single chime
when a perimeter door or window is closed.
¾To turn Chime On Close off or on:
1. Press A or B until the display shows OPTIONS.
2. Press # then A or B until the display shows CHIME ON CLOSE
OFF/ON (current setting).
3. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection.
Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Concord
67
Attach Schedules to Events Menu
The ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS menu lets you link the following system events to time
schedules:
•Latchkey Opening—sends a report if system is disarmed within the attached time schedule.
•Latchkey Closing—sends a report if system is armed within the attached time schedule.
•Exception Opening—sends a report if system is not disarmed within the attached time
schedule.
•Exception Closing—sends a report if system is not armed within the attached time sched-
ule.
•Lights (1–9) activate X10 controlled lights by the attached time schedule.
•Outputs (1–6) allow users to attach onboard (1–2) and SnapCard outputs to a schedule.
•Arming—Allows the user to arm the panel at the schedule start time.
Set Up Schedules (05XXY, where
XX=schedule 00-15 and Y=start [0]/stop[1]
Monday thru Sunday [2-8])
(Default = 00:00)
This menu lets you set up start/stop times for each day of
the week.
Schedules used by one partition cannot be viewed or
changed from a different partition.
Note
If you are programming schedules for your customer, be
sure to record the settings in the User’s Manual.
¾To set up a Time Schedule:
1. Press A or B until the display shows SET UP SCHEDULES.
2. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00. If you want a differ-
ent schedule number, press A or B until the desired schedule num-
ber appears.
3. Press # and the display shows START TIME hh:mm (current setting).
4. Enter the desired starting time (00:00–23:59). The display flashes
the entered time. Press # and the display shows START TIME hh:mm
(new setting).
5. Press B and the display shows STOP TIME hh:mm (current setting).
6. Enter the desired stop time (00:00–23:59). The display flashes the
entered time. Press # and the display shows STOP TIME hh:mm (new
setting).
7. Press B and the display shows MONDAY OFF/ON (current setting).
To select a different day, continue pressing B until the desired day
appears.
8. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection.
Press # and the display shows the new setting for the selected day.
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until all desired settings for each day are set.
Latchkey Reports (Opening: 060nn,
Closing: 061nn, where nn=Schedule
number [0 to 15])
Attach Schedules to Events (Default = off)
This setting lets you attach the Latchkey
Opening report feature and the Latchkey
Closing report feature to time schedules.
¾To Attach a Schedule to Latchkey Opening or Latchkey Closing:
1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
2. Press # then A or B until the display shows LATCHKEY OPENING OR LATCH-
KEY CLOSING
.
3. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you
want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
4. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and
the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
Concord 68
Exception Reports (Opening:
062nn, Closing: 063nn, where
nn=Schedule number [0 to 15])
Attach Schedules to Events (Default = off)
This setting lets you attach the Exception
Opening report feature and the Exception
Closing report feature to time schedules.
¾To Attach a Schedule to Exception Opening or Exception Closing:
1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
2. Press # then A or B until the display shows EXCEPTION OPENING OR EXCEP-
TION CLOSING
.
3. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you
want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
4. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and the
display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
Lights (064xnn where nn=Schedule
number [0 to 15] and x=light number
[1 to 9] minus 1)
Attach Schedules to Events (Default = off)
This setting lets you attach light controls to a
time schedule.
¾To Attach Schedules to Lights:
1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
2. Press # then A or B until the display shows LIGHTS. Press # to enter the
LIGHTS menu.
3. Press A or B until the desired light appears.
4. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you
want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and
the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 until all desired lights are attached to schedules.
Outputs (065xnn where nn=Sched-
ule number [0 to 15] and x=output
number [1 to 6] minus 1)
Attach Schedules to Events (Default = off)
This setting lets you attach outputs to a time
schedule. Onboard outputs are 1–2, Snap-
Card outputs are 3–6.
Note
Outputs can only be scheduled if text has been
entered in installer programming. Only onboard
and SnapCard outputs can be scheduled.
¾To Attach Schedules to Outputs:
1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
2. Press # then A or B until the display shows OUTPUTS. Press É to enter the
OUTPUTS menu.
3. Press A or B until the desired output appears.
4. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you
want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and
the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
6. Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 until all desired outputs are attached to schedules.
Arming (0660nn where nn=Sched-
ule number [0 to 15])
Attach Schedules to Events (Default = off)
This setting lets you arm according to a time
schedule.
Note
This setting will allow you to arm to AWAY only.
There is no disarm schedule.
¾To Attach Schedules to Arming:
1. Press A or B until the display shows ATTACH SCHEDULES TO EVENTS.
2. Press # then A or B until the display shows ARMING.
3. To select arm to AWAY press #.
4. Press # and the display shows SCHEDULE 00 OFF/ON (current setting). If you
want a different schedule, press A or B until the desired schedule appears.
5. Press 1 (off) or 2 (on). The display flashes the entered selection. Press # and
the display shows the new setting for the selected schedule.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired schedules are attached.
Concord
69
Energy Saver Menu
The ENERGY SAVER menu lets you set the Energy Saver Module or Dialog RF Thermostat low-
and high-setpoints. These setpoints override the premises thermostat allowing the Energy Saver
Module or Dialog RF Thermostat to activate the furnace/air conditioner.
Attach Lights to Sensors Menu
The ATTACH LIGHTS TO SENSORS menu lets you assign a light number to a sensor. Each time the
sensor is activated, the attached light will turn on for 5 minutes. When the 5 minute timer expires
the light will turn off. If the same light is scheduled, it will only turn on during the schedule time.
Low Setpoint (070) Energy Saver (Default = 50°F)
This setting determines the temperature at
which the energy saver module relay closes
to activate the furnace.
Note
The low setpoint cannot be set equal to or
higher than the high setpoint.
¾To set the Low Setpoint:
1. With the display showing ENERGY SAVER, press #, then A or B until the dis-
play shows LOW SETPOINT NN DEGREES (current setting).
2. Enter the desired temperature (45–89°). The display flashes the entered setting.
Press # and the display shows the new setting.
High Setpoint (071) Energy Saver (Default = 90°F)
This setting determines the temperature at
which the energy saver module relay closes
to activate the air-conditioner.
Note
The high setpoint cannot be set equal to or
lower than the low setpoint.
¾To set the High Setpoint:
1. With the display showing ENERGY SAVER, press #, then A or B until the dis-
play shows HIGH SETPOINT nn DEGREES (current setting).
2. Enter the desired temperature (46–90°). The display flashes the entered setting.
Press # and the display shows the new setting.
Light X to Sensor Y (08n where
n=light number [1-9] minus 1)
Attach Lights to Sensors (Default = 0)
This menu attaches light x to sensor y. Each
time a selected sensor is tripped, the selected
light will turn on and a 5 minute timer will
start.
Note
The sensor must be learned into the current par-
tition before it can be attached.
¾To attach a light to a sensor:
1. With the display showing LIGHT 1 TO SENSOR y (current setting), press A or
B to select the desired light number.
2. Enter the desired sensor number (01–96). The display flashes the entered
setting. Press # and the display shows the new setting.
3. Repeat steps 1 through 2 until all desired lights are attached to sensors.
¾To detach a light from a sensor:
1. With the display showing LIGHT 1 TO SENSOR y (current setting), press A or
B to select the desired light number.
2. Enter 0 as the sensor number and press #.
Concord 70
System Version Menu
The SYSTEM VERSION menu lets you view and identify panel hardware and software. This infor-
mation is primarily used for troubleshooting purposes.
Downloader Programming
The panel can be programmed remotely using Enterprise. Use the information you recorded in
Appendix A to inform the downloading operator of the programming requirements for this sys-
tem.
Enterprise Downloader Programming
Note
A Downloader Phone Num-
ber must be programmed
and the user-programmable
option “Downloading” must
be on for remote downloader
programming to work.
¾To initiate a Enterprise download session:
1. Contact your download station and ask the operator to prepare to download to the panel.
2. Make sure the system is disarmed.
3. Press 8 + system master code + 7 + 0 (any), 1 (down), or 2 (up). The display shows SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS during the downloading process.
If the alphanumeric touchpad does not display SYSTEM DOWNLOAD IN PROGRESS, call the down-
loader operator to verify the downloader phone number. Also, make sure ToolBox is set up prop-
erly. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” section if the problem persists.
Testing the
System
This section describes the following:
• Basic System Commands
• Testing Zones/Sensors
• Testing Phone Communication
• Testing Central Station Communication
• Testing Outputs and Sirens
Note
Before testing, it is recom-
mended that you have cov-
ers on all modules (mounted
outside the cabinet) and the
panel cabinet door closed.
The testing environment
should match the system
working environment.
• Testing Light Control
• Testing the Energy Saver Module
• Changing Fixed Display Touchpads
• Testing the Audio Verification Module
• Testing Cellular Backup Communication
You should test the system after installing or servicing and after adding or removing devices from
the system.
Refer to the “Troubleshooting” section if correct test results are not achieved.
System Version (Factory Code: 010,
System Number: 011, System Level:
012)
(Default = N/A)
This menu lets you view and identify panel
hardware and software version.
¾To view and identify the System Version:
1. Press A or B until the display shows SYSTEM VERSION.
2. Press # and the display shows FACTORY CODE nnn*nnnn.
3. Press B and the display shows SYSTEM NUMBER *nnnnnnn.
4. Press B again and the display shows SYSTEM LEVEL nnnn.
5. Press B again and the display shows SW VERSION nnnnx (panel firmware ver-
sion).
Concord
71
Basic System Commands
Table 8 describes basic touchpad operating commands. For complete details on system operation,
including user programming, refer to the system User’s Manual.
Testing Zones/Sensors
Test sensors/zones after all programming is completed, whenever there is a change in environ-
ment, equipment, or programming, and whenever a zone- or sensor-related problem occurs.
If the system does not respond as described in the following procedure, see the “Troubleshoot-
ing” section.
Note
While the sensor test is a
valuable installation and ser-
vice tool, it only tests sensor
operation for the current
conditions. You should per-
form a sensor test after any
change in environment,
equipment, or programming.
1. Place all sensors and zones in their non-alarm state.
2. At an alphanumeric touchpad, enter the sensor test mode by pressing 8 + installer code + 3.
The touchpad sounds one beep and displays SENSOR TEST. The panel starts a 15 minute
timer.
3. Trip each zone/sensor one at a time. Touchpads (and interior sirens) should sound one short,
high-pitched beep and the display should show the sensor name (or number) and OK.
4. Press the STATUS button when you think all zones/sensors are tested. The touchpad displays
any untested sensors/zones and touchpad panics. If all sensors/zones and touchpad panics
have been tested, the display shows SENSOR TEST OK.
5. Test any untested zones/sensors and touchpad panics.
Note
If you hear a long, low-
pitched beep, proceed to the
following section “If a Wire-
less Sensor Does Not Test.”
6. The system stays in sensor test mode for 15 minutes. When less than 5 minutes remain,
touchpads and interior sirens beep and the panel announces the remaining time over the
speakers once every minute. After 15 minutes the panel disarms to OFF, automatically. If
you need more time to complete the sensor test, press 8 + installer CODE + 3 while the sys-
tem is still in sensor test mode. This restarts the 15 minutes of test time.
Table 8: Basic Touchpad Commands
Command System Response
* (STATUS) Indicates current system status
* + * Indicates AC power, battery, and current system
status
1 + CODE Disarms system to OFF
2 + CODE Arms system to STAY
3 + CODE Arms system to AWAY
2 (quick arm on) Arms system to STAY
3 (quick arm on) Arms system to AWAY
2 or 3 + CODE + 4
or
2 or 3 + 4
Arm system—No Delay (no exit or entry delay)
5 + 2 or 3 + CODE
or
5 + 2 or 3
Arms system silently (no arming status beeps)
7 + 1 Turns chime feature on and off
7 + 2 Turns Energy Saver on and off
7 + 4 Partition jump without entering code (only if Parti-
tion Security option is off)
7 + 6 Identifies alarms in memory
7 + 7 + n (n = output number [1–6])
1–2 = onboard outputs
3–6 = module outputs
Turns the output on or off. (This command is only
functional after output text is entered into panel
memory.)
8 + CODE + 2 Initiates a phone test
8 + CODE + 3 Initiates a sensor test
8 + installer CODE + 3 Initiates a dealer sensor test
8 + CODE + 6 Partition jump
8 + CODE + 8 View Event History
0 + 0 Turns all controlled lights on and off
0 + n (n = light number 1-9) Turns individual controlled light on and off
Concord 72
7. When all sensors/zones and touchpad panics have been tested, press 1 + installer CODE to
exit sensor test mode.
If a Wireless Sensor Does Not Test
If touchpads display SENSOR FAILURE and sirens sound a long, low-pitched beep when a zone or
sensor is tripped, this indicates that the wireless sensor signal strength is below acceptable limits.
Distance from the receiver, the installation environment, or both, are most likely affecting the
sensor signal strength.
When possible, locate wireless sensors within 100 feet of the panel. While a transmitter may
have a range of 1,000 feet or more out in the open, the environment at the installation site can
have a significant effect on transmitter range. Refer to the “Troubleshooting” section to resolve
the problem.
For wireless sensors that don’t respond, use an RF Sniffer (60-401) test tool to verify that the sen-
sor is transmitting. Constant beeps from the RF Sniffer indicate a runaway (faulty) sensor.
Remove the sensor battery(s) and replace the sensor.
Testing Phone Communication
Perform a phone test to check the phone communication between the panel and the central moni-
toring station.
¾To perform a phone test:
1. Contact the central monitoring station to inform them that you are testing the system.
2. Press 8 + system master CODE + 2. The display reads PHONE TEST and the touchpad sounds
one beep. When the panel completes the test, the system returns to the previous arming level
automatically.
If the display continues to show PHONE TEST for 1½ minutes or more, enter 1 + system master
CODE and refer to the “Troubleshooting” section.
Testing Central Station/Pager Communication
After performing sensor and phone tests, check that the system is reporting alarms successfully
to the central station or pager.
Be sure to contact the central monitoring station before activating outputs that trigger
from an alarm condition.
Note
The way information is dis-
played varies with pager ser-
vices and may not match the
example above. Account
numbers with alpha-charac-
ters also vary when dis-
played, depending on pager
service. Account numbers
are not displayed if
STREAMLINING is turned
on.
¾To test communication with the central station/pager:
1. Call the central station and tell the operator that you will be testing the system.
2. Arm the system.
3. Test each of the touchpad and wireless panic buttons and trip at least one sensor of each type
(fire, intrusion, etc.) to verify correct operation.
4. Check pager displays to verify reports are received. Pagers display an event code, digit sen-
sor number, and the last four digits of the account number. For example, a pager display of
999 002 7468 indicates the following:
999 = alarm condition,
002 = sensor/zone in alarm or user number,
7468 = last four digits of account number.
5. When you finish testing the system, call the central monitoring station to verify that the
alarms were received.
Table 9 describes pager system event codes.
Caution
!
Concord
73
Table 10 describes pager sensor/zone number and user number report codes.
Testing Outputs and Sirens
All outputs (onboard and SnapCard) should be tested to verify configuration programming.
Be sure to contact the central monitoring station before activating outputs that trigger
from an alarm condition.
¾To test outputs:
1. Contact the central monitoring station to inform them you are testing the system.
2. Verify that all wiring at the panel and output devices is correct.
3. Activate the appropriate device to trigger each output as programmed.
4. Verify that each output responds according to the programmed configuration number. For
outputs that trigger sirens, verify that the correct alarm sounds are produced from these
sirens. Table 11 describes the system alarm sounds you should hear for each alarm event.
5. Contact the central monitoring station when you are finished testing.
Table 9: Pager System Event Codes
Code System Event
009 Zone Restoral
111 System Disarmed
115 Sensor Test Exit
118 Trouble condition cleared
119 Alarm Canceled
222 System Armed to STAY
333 System Armed to AWAY
555 Phone/Sensor Test
888 System Trouble Condition
999 System in Alarm
Table 10: Pager Sensor/Zone Code and Numbers
Code Sensor/Zone or User Number
000 System event not caused by a zone or user
001–096 Sensor/Zone Numbers 1–96
600–829 Regular User Codes 0–229 used
846 System Master Code used
847 Installer Code used
848 Dealer Code used
850 Quick Arm used
851 Keyswitch Sensor used
852 System Armed Itself (during service or power-up)
Table 11: System Alarm Sounds
Alarm Type Alarm Sound
Fire Repeating series of three beeps
Police/Intrusion Continuous tone
Auxiliary Rapid beeps
Caution
!
Concord 74
Testing Light Control
Test all lights plugged into X10 Lamp Modules to verify house code and light number settings.
¾To test light control:
1. Press 0 + 0 repeatedly to turn all lights on and off together.
2. Press 0 + 1 repeatedly to turn light 1 on and off.
3. Repeat step 2 for remaining lights (0 + 2 for light 2, 0 + 3 for light 3, etc.).
4. Arm the system to Away. All lights plugged into modules set to Unit 1 (or set as entry lights)
should turn on and stay on for 5 minutes. All lights plugged into modules set to Unit 2
should blink three times to indicate the arming level. Remaining lights should not be
affected.
5. Disarm the system. If Unit 1 (or entry) lights were on for an entry or alarm, they will turn off
in 5 minutes. Unit 2 lights should blink once to indicate the system is off. Remaining lights
should not be affected.
6. All lights should turn on and remain on during fire and auxiliary/medical alarms. All lights
should flash during a police or intrusion alarm.
Testing the Energy Saver Module (ESM)
Test the Energy Saver Module to verify it overrides the thermostat.
Note
The system must have high-
and low-temperature limits
set to test the Energy Saver
Module.
¾To test the Energy Saver Module:
1. Press * (status) + * (status) to display the system status, ENERGY SAVER OFF, and the present
TEMPERATURE nn°. The temperature displayed (and/or announced) should match the house
thermostat. If the temperatures do not match, refer to the ACCESSORY MODULES—BUS
DEVICES menu in the “Programming” section.
Note
There is a 5-minute delay
after the Energy Saver Mod-
ule returns control to the fur-
nace/AC before it will
override the furnace/AC
again.
2. Press 7 + 2 to turn on the ESM. The display shows ENERGY SAVER ON and the ESM relay will
click once.
3. Press 7 + 2 again to turn the ESM off. The display shows ENERGY SAVER OFF.
Changing Fixed Display LCD Touchpad Chime and
Trouble Beep Tones
The frequency (pitch) of chime and trouble beep tones from a fixed display touchpad can be
adjusted to a more desirable or distinct tone, or to compensate for hearing impaired persons.
¾To change status tone pitch:
1. Press and hold the * and 0 buttons together until you hear a steady tone, then release the but-
tons.
Note
Chime and trouble beep
tones sound using the
default frequency during, or
within 15 seconds of, any
button activity at that specific
touchpad.
2. Press and hold 1 to lower the pitch or press and hold 2 to raise the pitch.
3. Release the button when the desired pitch is heard.
After about 15 seconds of no touchpad activity, the steady tone stops sounding.
Adjusting Touchpad Display Contrast
Touchpad displays can be adjusted for easier viewing to help compensate for lighting conditions
in the touchpad location. The contrast adjustment lightens or darkens the text.
Note
Vacuum fluorescent displays
do not have a contrast
adjustment.
¾To adjust display contrast:
1. Enter configuration mode by pressing the D and 6 buttons together for at least two seconds.
The display shows DA nnn.
2. Press and release the 1 and 2 buttons together repeatedly, until the desired contrast level is
displayed.
3. Press * and the display briefly shows DONE, then shows the time and date.
Testing Audio Verification Module (AVM) Communication
Test the Audio Verification Module from off-site and the central station to verify that it works
properly.
¾To test the module from off-site:
You will need a helper and touch-tone phone at an off-site location to perform this test. When
testing the AVM from off-site the following guidelines must be followed.
• The Remote Access feature must be set to on (default).
Concord
75
• The Audio Verify feature must be set to on.
• The system must be in a non-alarm state.
• Optional Ring/Hang/Ring feature must be on (default) to work with steps 1 and 2 below.
Otherwise wait for 12 rings and the panel will pick up automatically.
1. The off-site helper calls the panel, lets the phone ring twice, and hangs up.
2. The helper must call the panel again in 10 to 40 seconds. The panel answers System hello.
3. The helper dials the following on the phone, # 1234 # 8 (AVM access CODE) 5.
4. The helper should now be able to hear you through the AVM.
5. Walk through the vicinity of the AVM while speaking at a normal conversation level.
6. Tell the helper to dial a 1 and speak to you. To return to listen mode, the helper dials a 3.
7. When testing is complete, have the helper dial 99 and hang up.
¾To test the module with the central station:
1. Inform the central station that you will be sending an alarm and testing an AVM.
2. Give them the programming selections you made for the panel (see “Audio Verification
Menu” for programming information).
3. Use a touchpad panic button to initiate an auxiliary alarm.
4. The central station operator waits for the alarm to be reported and initiates an audio session.
5. Walk through the vicinity of the AVM while speaking at a normal conversation level.
6. Have the operator speak to you.
7. When testing is complete, the operator will end the session.
Testing Cellular Backup Communication
Perform this test to check the cellular communication between the panel and the central monitor-
ing station.
¾To test Cellular Communication:
1. Contact the central monitoring station to inform them that you are testing the system.
2. Install and activate the SuperBus 2000 Cellular Backup Module.
3. Verify or change the following CS PHONE 1 panel option settings shown in Table 12.
Note
If the current settings do not
match the test settings,
record the current settings
(Table 12), so that they can
be restored when this test is
complete.
4. Disconnect the phone line by unplugging the Db-8 cord from the RL-31X Jack.
5. Initiate a phone test (8 + System Master Code + 2).
6. The phone test attempt should fail via the phone line within 5 minutes. The panel will emit a
long low tone (and speak “phone failure 1” if so equipped).
7. Wait for the phone test to succeed via the cell backup. The panel should emit a short high
tone (and speak “phone test ok” if so equipped).
8. Verify the CS report.
9. If success does not occur, verify that the signal strength (RSSI) shown on the Cellular
Backup Module is acceptable and repeat steps 5-8.
10. Restore previous CS PHONE 1 settings if needed.
Table 12: Current Phone Settings
CS PHONE 1 Option Test Setting Previous Setting
PHONE NUMBER Central station phone number
HIGH LEVEL RPTS ON
BACKUP OFF*
CELLULAR BACKUP ON
* Can be set to ON if no CS PHONE 2 PHONE NUMBER is programmed.
Concord 76
Troubleshooting This section describes what to do if you experience problems with system operation. If after per-
forming the troubleshooting procedures the panel still malfunctions, please call Technical Sup-
port at 1-800-777-2624.
Feature Problem Action/Solution
Panel Power
Panel does not power up. Touchpads don’t display or respond.
1. Verify that the panel transformer is plugged into an unswitched outlet.
2. Check the AC circuit breaker to be sure the circuit is live.
3. Check that the backup battery is installed correctly and the AC power transformer is plugged in.
4. Check for proper panel and transformer wiring.
5. Measure the incoming AC voltage at panel terminals 1 and 2. It should read about 16.5 VAC.
No incoming AC voltage at panel terminals 1 and 2.
1. Unplug the AC power transformer and disconnect the wires from the transformer and the panel.
2. Check transformer to panel wire for short or open circuits.
3. Plug in the transformer and check for 16.5 VAC at the transformer unconnected terminals. If
zero (0) volts, replace the transformer.
Touchpad display indicates System Low Battery or voice sounds “System low battery.”
1. Check that the backup battery is installed correctly and the AC power transformer is plugged in.
2. Measure the incoming AC voltage at panel terminals 1 and 2. It should read about 16.5 VAC.
3. Check for 11.75 to 13.8 VDC battery voltage between the backup
battery spade lugs. If the battery voltage is not within this range, replace the battery.
Note
When the panel is running a backup battery test, the reading at the connected battery can range from
11.2 to 13.5 VDC. The panel automatically runs a backup battery test under the following conditions: (1)
on initial power-up, (2) during user sensor test, (3) once every minute when backup battery has failed,
(4) once every 24 hours at the programmed STIME (UL 98 Options off) or once every 4 hours (UL 98
Options on).
With the AC power transformer plugged in, the panel automatically charges the battery. While the bat-
tery is charging for the first time it is normal for the system to indicate System Low Battery. This can take
a number of hours depending on the initial battery charge. Once the battery reaches 12.5 VDC (full
charge as measured while in battery test), the condition clears. If the trouble condition persists after 24
hours, replace the backup battery.
The touchpads flash AC or display AC Power Failure/AC Failure After pressing STATUS. (Panel continues to oper-
ate from backup battery).
1. Check the AC circuit breaker to be sure the circuit is live.
2. Check for proper panel and transformer wiring.
3. Check that the transformer is plugged into a nonswitched outlet and secured with the provided
screw.
4. Check that the transformer is supplying AC to the panel. (Transformer internal fuse may be
blown.
Be careful when securing the transformer to an outlet with a metal cover. Hold the cover
tightly in place. You could receive a serious shock if the metal outlet cover drops down onto
the prongs of the plug while you are securing the transformer and cover to the outlet box.
Access Codes
Customer cannot remember access code(s).
1. Check your records to see if you have the customer’s access code(s) on file.
2. Verify the access code(s) using the Downloader.
3. Clear memory and reprogram the panel locally.
4. Clearing the memory will erase onboard hardwire zone factory programming.
Installer cannot remember install code.
Warning
!
Concord
77
1. Check your records to see if you have the install code on file.
2. Verify the install code using the Downloader.
3. Use the Dealer Code to enter program mode and view the installer code.
Installer cannot remember dealer code.
Check your records to see if you have the dealer code on file.
Arming and Disarming
System protests and won’t arm.
1. If arming to level 2, make sure all monitored perimeter doors and windows are closed.
2. If arming to level 3, make sure all perimeter and interior sensors are closed.
3. Press STATUS for an indication of the problem.
System won’t disarm.
1. Disarming using incorrect code. Enter correct code.
2. Access code is not programmed or set up in user programming to disarm system.
3. Wireless touchpad is not learned into system or hardwire touchpad is not communicating to
panel. Check installer programming for learned wireless touchpads.
4. The installer code is being used to disarm the system. The system is designed not to disarm
using the installer code. Use a regular or system master code to disarm the system.
Bypassing
Touchpad indicates Invalid and/or “Invalid” is heard when you attempt to bypass a sensor.
1. Attempting to bypass a 24-hour sensor that cannot be bypassed (group 26 fire sensors).
2. Sensor is not active in the current arming level.
System cancels sensor bypass when you try to arm to level 2 or 3.
Sensor is being bypassed before arming to 2—STAY or 3—AWAY. Arm to the desired level before
bypassing a sensor.
Wireless Sensor and Touchpad Batteries
System indicates Sensor/Touchpad nn low battery.
Replace the indicated device battery. Test the sensor/touchpad after replacing the battery.
Note
If the sensor/touchpad is not tested after battery replacement, the system continues to show a low bat-
tery condition, since that was the last signal it received from the device. Testing the sensor/touchpad
with new batteries allows the panel to receive a signal with good battery information.
Central Station/Pager Reporting
Central station/pager is not receiving reports.
1. Check that the premises phone line is working.
2. Perform a phone test.
3. Check that the DB-8 cord is plugged into the RJ-31X/CA-38A jack.
4. Check that the DB-8 cord is wired correctly to the panel.
5. Check for correct phone line wiring between the TELCO block and RJ-31X/CA-38A jack.
6. Replace faulty RJ-31X/CA-38A jack.
7. Replace faulty DB-8 cord.
8. Verify that central station/pager phone number is programmed into the panel. Reprogram the
phone number and retest, if necessary.
9. Verify that the correct phone format (SIA or CID) is being used.
10. For pagers, extend the pager delay setting (see the PHONE OPTIONS—GLOBAL menu in the “Pro-
gramming” section.
Alphanumeric Touchpads
Display shows all ************.
Touchpad is not connected to panel bus terminals or is wired incorrectly. Check and correct wiring.
Display is blank.
Feature Problem Action/Solution
Concord 78
1. Check that panel is powered up.
2. Check for touchpad power and/or bus miswiring, opens, or shorts.
3. Check touchpad brightness setting (see the user-programming OPTIONS menu in the “Program-
ming” section).
Touchpad buttons don’t beep when pressed.
1. Check for touchpad power and/or bus miswiring, opens, or shorts.
2. Check that key beeps option is set to on (see the ACCESSORY MODULES—BUS DEVICES menu in
the “Programming” section).
Fixed Display Touchpads
Display is lit but does not respond to key presses.
1. Touchpad is not connected to panel bus terminals or is wired incorrectly. Check and correct wir-
ing.
2. Check that touchpad is learned into panel memory.
Display is blank.
1. Check that panel is powered up.
2. Check for touchpad power and/or bus miswiring, opens, or shorts.
3. Check touchpad brightness setting (see the user-programming OPTIONS menu in the “Program-
ming” section).
Touchpad buttons don’t beep when pressed.
1. Check for touchpad power and/or bus miswiring, opens, or shorts.
2. Check that key beeps option is set to on (see the ACCESSORY MODULES—BUS DEVICES menu in
the “Programming” section).
Speakers
Speakers don’t sound alarms.
1. Check for correct wiring at speaker and panel terminals; correct where necessary.
2. Speaker output has shut down because panel detected terminal 7 or 8 is shorted to ground.
Disconnect panel AC and battery backup power. Locate short and correct. Apply panel AC and
backup battery power and retest.
3. Alarm is in partition 2-6 and speaker is connected to panel terminals 7 and 8, which activate
only for partition 1 alarms.
Sirens
Piezo sirens connected to SnapCard, or onboard (panel) outputs 1 and/or 2 don’t produce any alarm sounds.
1. Check for incorrect wiring between siren and panel; correct where necessary.
2. Output has not been configured (set up) to activate sirens. Enter program mode and configure
output (see ACCESSORY MODULES—BUS DEVICES—SNAP CARD, or ONBOARD OPTIONS—
OUTPUT 1, 2 in the “Programming” section).
3. Check for correct output partition assignment.
Hardwire Zones
System doesn’t go into alarm when zone is tripped.
1. System is disarmed. Arm system and then trip the zone.
2. Zone is not learned into panel memory. Enter installer/dealer program mode—LEARN SENSORS,
and learn zone into memory.
3. Zone is learned into wrong partition. Delete zone and learn into correct partition or change the
partition in the EDIT SENSORS menu.
4. For HIM zones, check that the HIM LED is blinking to verify communication with the panel. If
LED is off, check wiring between HIM and panel.
Zone reports trouble condition.
1. Check that onboard, HIM, and SnapCard zone inputs have a 2k-ohm EOL resistor installed at
the last device on the loop in series for N/C loops, in parallel for N/O loops.
2. Check for zone wire fault—short circuit on N/C loops, open circuit on N/O loops.
3. Make sure all devices on zone are in non-alarm state, then enter disarm command to reset
zone.
Wireless Sensor Zones
System doesn’t respond (in sensor test or when armed) when sensor is tripped.
Feature Problem Action/Solution
Concord
79
1. Verify that receiver antennas are installed and connections are secure.
2. Check that the wireless sensor battery(s) are installed.
3. Check the sensor battery(s) for low voltage. Replace battery(s) if necessary.
4. Use an RF Sniffer (60-401) to verify that sensor is transmitting.
5. Sensor is not learned into panel memory. Enter installer/dealer program mode—LEARN SEN-
SORS, and learn sensor into memory.
6. Zone is learned into wrong partition. Delete zone and learn into correct partition or change the
partition in the EDIT SENSORS menu.
Sensor reports trouble condition.
1. Sensor tamper switch is tripped—sensor cover is off, not latched securely, or sensor is not
mounted securely. Secure sensor mounting and/or cover, then trip sensor to clear the condi-
tion.
2. Check the sensor battery for low voltage. Replace batteries, if necessary.
Touchpad indicates [sensor #] supervisory and/or Sensor [sensor #] supervisory is heard.
1. Use an RF Sniffer (60-401) to verify that sensor is transmitting. If sensor is not transmitting,
check battery for low or no voltage and replace.
2. Change mounting position of sensor (from horizontal to vertical or vice versa) and test sensor
several times for consistency.
3. Sensor signal is not reaching panel/receiver because sensor is too far away. Remove sensor
from mounted location and test from other locations. Mount sensor in area where signal can
reach panel/receiver or install a SuperBus 2000 RF Transceiver in the vicinity of the sensor.
Smoke sensor beeps once every 44 seconds.
Sensor batteries are getting low. Replace batteries.
Wireless Touchpads
System doesn’t respond to commands entered from wireless touchpad.
1. Verify that receiver antennas are installed and connections are secure.
2. Check that touchpad battery(s) are properly installed.
3. Check the touchpad battery(s) for low voltage. Replace battery(s), if necessary.
4. Use an RF Sniffer (60-401) to verify that touchpad is transmitting.
5. Touchpad is not learned into panel memory. Enter program mode and learn touchpad into
memory (see LEARN SENSORS).
6. Touchpad is learned into wrong partition. Delete touchpad and learn into correct partition or
change the partition in the EDIT SENSORS menu.
Touchpad reports trouble condition.
Check the touchpad battery(s) for low voltage. Replace battery(s), if necessary.
Phones
Loss of dial tone at on-site phones after wiring RJ-31X jack or connecting the DB-8 cord.
1. Wait 2 minutes and try again. The panel may be busy trying to report to the central station.
2. Disconnect the panel DB-8 cord from the RJ-31X jack. If the phone still doesn’t work, the sys-
tem is okay and the problem is in the wiring.
3. Check RJ-31X jack wiring and TELCO block wiring. Replace RJ-31X jack if necessary.
4. Check DB-8 cord connections at the panel and RJ-31X jack. Replace cord if necessary.
5. Perform a phone test after troubleshooting the phone line.
Constant dial tone, preventing dial-out on premises phones.
One or more polarity-sensitive phones exist on-site. Reverse the phone wires connected to the
brown and gray wire terminals on the RJ-31X jack.
Light Control
Light controlled by X10 Lamp Module is not working.
Feature Problem Action/Solution
Concord 80
1. Check that the lamp has a working bulb and that the lamp switch is on.
2. Check to make sure X10 module is not plugged into an outlet controlled by a switch. Move to a
nonswitched outlet location and test.
3. Panel is not powered by a power line carrier transformer. Replace existing transformer with a
power line carrier transformer.
4. Power transformer and X10 modules are not plugged into outlets on the same electrical phase.
Relocate modules or transformer to different outlets to determine working locations.
5. Check that the HOUSE dial on the X10 module matches the partition house code programmed
into the panel.
6. X10 module is located in wrong partition. Move module to correct partition and retest.
7. Partition house codes are not programmed into panel. Enter program mode and set partition
house codes.
Energy Saver Module
Module does not respond to system commands or appear to control furnace.
1. Check that the module is wired correctly to the panel terminals.
2. Verify the module LED is flashing continuously. If the LED is not flashing, remove power and
check wiring.
3. There is a 5-minute delay after the module returns control to the furnace/AC thermostat, before
the module overrides the thermostat again. Wait 5-minutes and try again.
Module temperature does not match actual room temperature.
The module room temperature setting has not been adjusted or was adjusted before the module
warmed or cooled to room temperature. To ensure accuracy, wait at least 15 minutes after installing
the module before adjusting the temperature. To adjust the module room temperature setting, see
TEMPERATURE under the ACCESSORY MODULES—BUS DEVICES—UNIT-ID—ENERGY OPTIONS menu in
the section “Programming the Panel.”
Automation Module
Module is not controlling or communicating with the panel and panel indicates a “BUS FAILURE UNIT nn” where nn is
the Automation Module bus unit number.
1. Check that the module is wired correctly to the panel terminals.
2. Verify the SuperBus Module’s red LED is flashing continuously. If the LED is not flashing,
remove power and check wiring.
Module is not controlling or communicating with the panel and panel indicates a “BUS FAILURE UNIT AMnn” where nn
is the Automation Module bus unit number.
1. Check that the RS-232 cable is firmly connected to the Automation Module and the Automation
Device.
2. Verify the Automation Device is powered and turned on.
Module is not controlling or communicating with the panel and panel does not indicate a bus failure.
Verify the Automation Module is learned into panel memory.
Cellular Backup Module
Cellular backup report does not occur.
1. Verify the Cellular Backup option is on for the CS phone number being tested.
2. Verify that the module is learned into panel memory.
3. Check that the Cellular Backup Module has been activated as outlined in the device Installation
Instructions.
The panel indicates “auxiliary phone trouble 1.”
1. Check the antenna connection.
2. Adjust the antenna positioning for maximum signal.
3. Verify Cellular System setting.
4. Check that the Cellular Backup Module has been activated as outlined in the device Installation
Instructions.
The panel indicates “auxiliary phone trouble 2.”
1. Check the antenna connection.
2. Adjust the antenna positioning for maximum signal.
3. Verify Cellular System setting.
The panel indicates “auxiliary phone trouble 3.”
Feature Problem Action/Solution
Concord
81
1. Check the antenna connection.
2. Adjust the antenna positioning for maximum signal.
The panel indicates “auxiliary phone trouble 4.”
Contact the cellular provider for details.
The panel indicates “auxiliary phone trouble 5.”
Contact the cellular provider for details.
The panel indicates “auxiliary phone trouble 6.”
Replace the module.
SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway Module
Module is not communicating on Bus and indicates a “Bus Failure Unit nn”. Where nn represents the Wireless Gate-
way unit number.
1. Check that the module is wired correctly to the panel terminals.
2. Verify that the module’s red Bus LED is flashing. If not, remove power and check all the wiring.
Module’s status LED’s don’t turn on after initial power-up.
1. Wait 5 - 8 minutes for the module to communicate with alarm.com.
2. Access code Lock feature must be turned off to work properly.
Module doesn’t communicate with alarm.com.
1. Check module’s status LED’s. Refer to the “SuperBus 2000 Wireless Gateway Module” instruc-
tions for a description of the LED’s.
Feature Problem Action/Solution
Concord 82
Appendix A:
System
Planning
Worksheets
Customer Name _________________________________
Address _______________________________________
City _________________ County ___________ State ___
Zip __________ Phone (____) ___________
Table A1: Wireless Devices
Part No. Description Qty.
60-362 Door/Window Sensor
60-670 SAW Door/Window Sensor
60-741-95 Micro Recessed Door/Window Sensor
60-499 Slim Line Door/Window Sensor
60-688 Micro Door/Window Sensor
60-641 Long-Life Door/Window Sensor
60-461* Shock Sensor
60-459* Sound Sensor
60-462* Glass Guard Sensor
60-506 System Sensor Smoke Sensor
60-838-95R 2100ARFT Smoke Sensor
60-848-01-95 ESL 562 Smoke Sensor
60-460 Rate-of-Rise Heat Sensor
60-589* Manual Fire Pull Sensor
60-504* Freeze Sensor
60-452 Pendant Panic Sensor
60-458 Single Button Panic Sensor
60-457 Dual Button Panic Sensor
60-578 Water-Resistant Panic Sensor
60-511-01-95 DS924i PIR Motion Sensor
60-639-95R SAW Indoor PIR Motion Sensor
60-639-95R-OD SAW Outdoor PIR Motion Sensor (Not
for intrusion protection)
60-703-95 Crystal Indoor PIR Motion Sensor
60-834-95 Adjustable Dual technology Sound
Sensor
60-597 HiTech Handheld Wireless Touchpad
60-607 2-Button Keychain Touchpad
60-606 4-Button Keychain Touchpad
60-659-95R SAW 4-Button Keychain Touchpad
60-832-95R 2-Button ELM Keychain Touchpad
600-XXXX-95 Dialog RF Iconized LCD Touchpad
60-909-95 Dialog RF Thermostat
60-XXX-95 Dialog RF Siren
Concord
83
* These devices not listed, investigated, or verified by UL.
† Listed, but not tested for compatibility by UL.
Table A2: Hardwire Devices
Part No. Description Qty. mA
(Max.) Sub Total
Hardwire Sensors/Detectors
N/A
System Sensor models 2100D, 2100TD, 2100S,
2100TS, 2400, or 2400TH or ESL series 429AT,
521B or 521BXT
10 mA
13-082 PIR Motion Detector 10 mA
Sirens
13-046 Hardwire Exterior Siren 145 mA
13-949 Hardwire Interior Siren 85 mA
13-950 Piezo Dynamic Exterior Siren 150 mA
SuperBus 2000/Miscellaneous Components
60-746-01 2x16 LCD Alphanumeric Touchpad 90 mA
60-820 Fixed Display LCD Touchpad 30 mA
60-803 2x20 LCD Alphanumeric Touchpad 120 mA
60-804 2x20 VFD Alphanumeric Touchpad 120 mA
60-983 ATP 1000 110 mA
60-984 ATP 2600 165 mA
60-985 ATP 2100 165 mA
600-1013 GTS 50 300 mA
60-777-01 Phone Interface/Voice Module 600 mA
600-1025-95R RF Transceiver 55 mA
600-1019 2 Amp Power Supply N/A
60-756 4 Input/2 Output SnapCard 185 mA
60-757 8Z Hardwire Zone Expander SnapCard 230 mA
60-758 4 Output SnapCard 130 mA
60-774 Hardwire Input Module 18 mA
60-770 Hardwire Output Module 91 mA
60-620-01 Energy Saver Module 20 mA
60-677* Interrogator 200 Audio Verification Module 10 mA
60-783-02* Automation Module 35 mA
Total power consumption: mA
Total power consumption not to exceed: 1,000 mA
Concord 84
Table A3: Zone and Sensor Assignments
No. RF Zone Module Bus
ID Number
Module Input
Number Group Partition Zone/Sensor Text
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Concord
85
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
Table A3: Zone and Sensor Assignments (Continued)
No. RF Zone Module Bus
ID Number
Module Input
Number Group Partition Zone/Sensor Text
Concord 86
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
Table A3: Zone and Sensor Assignments (Continued)
No. RF Zone Module Bus
ID Number
Module Input
Number Group Partition Zone/Sensor Text
Table A4: System Settings Index and Record
Setting (reference) default Shortcut No. Setting
Installer Programming—8 + Installer/Dealer CODE + 00
24 Hour Tamper Off 06000
AC Failure Off 06010
Access Code Lock (On) 0003
Access Timeout 90 sec 0904
Account No. 00000 0010-0060
Activity Timeout 24 hrs 0305
Alarm Verify Off 06108-06608
Antenna Tamper Off 06001
Audio Mode 1 0901
Audio Verify Off 0900
Auto Phone Test Off 02001
Auto Stay Arming On 0014-0064
Auto Test Reset On 02002
Auxiliary Panic On 0511-0561
Aux Power Fail Off
AVM Access Code None 0906
Back In Service On 06002
Backup CS Phone 1 On, CS Phone 2-3 Off 0105, 0115, 0125 1_____________2_____________3___________
Battery Restoral Off 06005
Beep Delay 2 sec 0905
Buffer Control Off 06001
Buffer Full Report Off 06006
Bypass Reports Off 06003
Call Wait Cancel None 02009
Cancel Message On 02007
Cellular Backup CS Phone 1 On, CS Phone 2-3 Off 0107, 0117, 0127 1_____________2_____________3___________
Cellular System B
Closing Reports Off 06101, 06201 1_____________2_____________
Comm. Failure On 02003
CS Phone 1-3 None 0100, 0110, 0120 1_____________2_____________3___________
Daylight Saving On 0306
Dealer Code None 0002
Concord
87
Delete Sensors None 082
Dial Tone Detect On 02010
Dialer Abort On 02005
Dial Abort Delay 30 sec 02006
Disable Trouble Beeps Off 0701
Downloader Code 12345 0000
Downloader Phone No. None 0180
DTMF Dialing On 02004
Duress Code None 0017-0067
Duress Option Off 06104-06604
Edit Sensors None 083
Entry Delay 30 sec 0310-0360
Entry Lights none 0400-0450
Exception Reports (phones) Off 0103, 0113, 0123 1_____________2_____________3___________
Exception Reports (pagers) Off 0133, 0143, 0153,
0163, 0173
1_____________2_____________3___________
4_____________5_____________
Exit Delay 60 sec 0311-0361
Exit Extension On 0013-0063
Extended Delay 4 min 0312-0362
Fire Panic On 0510-0560
Fire Shutdown Off 0902
Force Armed Off 06105-06605
Freeze Alarm Off 06107-06607
Freeze Temp 42 06108-06608
Global Fire Off 0704
High Level Reports (phones) CS Phone 1 On, CS
Phone 2-3 Off 0101, 0111, 0121 1_____________2_____________3___________
High Level Reports (pagers) On 0131, 0141, 0151,
0161, 0171
1_____________2_____________3___________
4_____________5_____________
House Code 1B, 2C, 3D, 4E, 5F, 6G 0401-0451
Immediate Beeps Off 0700
Installer Code 4321 0001
Keychain TP Arming Off 0513-0563
Keychain TP PTN 0006
Keyswitch Sensor None 0015-0065
Keyswitch Style Transition 0016-0066
Latchkey Format Off 06106-06606
Latchkey Reports (pagers) On 0135, 0145, 0155,
0165, 0175
1_____________2_____________3___________
4_____________5_____________
Latchkey Zones None 0500
Learn Sensors None 080
Line Fail Delay None 0213
Local Phone Control On 0210-0260
Low CPU Battery On 06004
Low Level Reports (phones) CS Phone 1 On, CS Phone
2-3 Off 0102, 0112, 0122 1_____________2_____________3___________
Table A4: System Settings Index and Record (Continued)
Setting (reference) default Shortcut No. Setting
Concord 88
Low Level Reports (pagers) Off 0132, 0142, 0152,
0162, 0172
1_____________2_____________3___________
4_____________5____________
Multi-PTN Arm Off 0005
Next Phone Test 7 days 0303
No Activity Off 06103, 06203 1_____________2____________
Open/Close Reports (phones) Off 0104, 0114, 0124 1_____________2_____________3___________
Open/Close Reports (pagers) Off 0134, 0144, 0154,
0164, 0174
1_____________2_____________3___________
4_____________5_____________
Opening Reports Off 06100-06600
Onboard Output 1 01614- any audible alarm 11101
Onboard Output 2 01710 - status & alarm tones 11111
Output Trip Time 4 sec 0304
Pager Delay 15 sec 02008
Pager Partition Assignment 1 0137, 0147, 0157,
0167, 0177
1_____________2_____________3___________
4_____________5_____________
Pager Phone 1-5 None 0130, 0140, 0150,
0160, 0170
1_____________2_____________3___________
4_____________5_____________
Partition Security On 0004
Phone Access Key # 0216-0266
Phone Panic Off 0215-0265
Phone Test On 02000
Phone Test Freq. 7 days 0302
Police Panic On 0512-0562
Program Report Off 06015
Quick Arm Off 0011-0061
Quick Exit On 0012-0062
Receiver Failure Off 06011
Recent Closings On 06102-06602
Remote Access On 0211-0221
RF Low Battery Rpt Weekly 06012
RF Supervisory Rpt Weekly 06013
RF TX Timeout 12 hrs 0301
Ring/Hang/Ring On 0212-0262
Reporting Format (SIA/CID) CID 0106, 0116, 0126 1_____________2_____________3___________
Sensor Text None 081
SIA False Alarm Reduction 0004
Silent Talkback Off 0903
Siren Timeout 4 min 0313-0363
Siren Verify Off 0710
Sleep Time Off 0314-0364
Smoke Verify Off 1100
SnapCard Output 1 (01400 - keychain touchpad star
button activation) 101001
SnapCard Output 2 (00410 - any audible alarm) 101011
SnapCard Output 3 (00903 - arming to STAY or AWAY) 101021
SnapCard Output 4 (01003 - arming to AWAY) 101031
Star Is No Delay Off 0514-0564
Table A4: System Settings Index and Record (Continued)
Setting (reference) default Shortcut No. Setting
Concord
89
Streamlining On 0136, 0146, 0156,
0166, 0176
1_____________2_____________3___________
4_____________5_____________
Supervisory Time 03:00 0300
Swinger Limit 1 06014
SWS Code 003 0703
System Tamper Off 06109-06609
Toll Saver On 0214-0264
TP Panic RPT FMT Off 06009
Two Trip Error Off 06008
Two Wire Smoke Off 1101
UL 98 Options Off 0702
Zone Restorals Off 06007
Table A4: System Settings Index and Record (Continued)
Setting (reference) default Shortcut No. Setting
Concord 90
Appendix B:
Reference
Tables
Table B1: Sensor Group Characteristics
No. Name Application Alarm Delay
Restoral
Supervisory
CS Report
Chime (Level 1)
Active Levels
00 Fixed Panic 24-hour audible fixed emergency buttons. Police Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
01 Portable Panic 24-hour audible portable emergency buttons. Police Instant √1, 2, 3
02 Fixed Panic 24-hour silent fixed emergency buttons. Silent Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
03 Portable Panic 24-hour silent portable emergency buttons. Silent Instant √1, 2, 3
04 Fixed Auxiliary 24-hour auxiliary sensor, such as Pendant Panic or
holdup button. Auxiliary Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
05 Fixed Auxiliary 24-hour auxiliary emergency button. Siren shutoff
confirms CS report. Auxiliary Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
06 Portable Auxiliary 24-hour portable auxiliary alert button. Auxiliary Instant √1, 2, 3
07 Portable Auxiliary 24-hour portable auxiliary button. Siren shutoff con-
firms CS report. Auxiliary Instant √1, 2, 3
08 Special Intrusion Special belongings, such as gun cabinets and wall
safes. Police Instant √ √ √ 1, 2, 3
09 Special Intrusion Special belongings (i.e. gun cabinets and wall safes.) Police Standard √ √ √ 1, 2, 3
10 Entry/Exit Delay Entry and exit doors that require a standard delay
time. Police Standard √ √ √ √ 2, 3
11 Entry/Exit Delay Garage doors and entrances that require an extended
delay time. * Police Extended √ √ √ √ 2, 3
12 Entry/Exit Delay Driveway gates and entrances that require a twice
extended delay time. * Police Twice
Extended √ √ √ √ 2, 3
13 Instant Perimeter Exterior doors and windows. Police Instant √ √ √ √ 2, 3
14 Instant Interior Interior doors. Police Follower √ √ √ 2, 3
15 Instant Interior Interior PIR motion sensors. * Police Follower √ √ 2, 3
16 Instant Interior Interior doors. Police Follower √ √ √ 3
17 Instant Interior PIR motion sensors. * Police Follower √ √ 3
18 Instant Interior Instant Interior Cross-Zone# PIR motion sensors. * † Police Follower √ √ 3
19 Delayed Interior Interior doors that initiate a delay before going into
alarm. * Police Standard √ √ √ 3
20 Delayed Interior PIR motion sensors that initiate a delay before going
into alarm. * Police Standard √ √ 3
21 Local Instant
Interior
24-hour local alarm zone protecting anything that
opens and closes. Police Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
22 Local Delayed
Interior
Same as group 21, plus activation initiates a delay
before going into alarm. Police Standard √ √ 1, 2, 3
23 Local Instant
Auxiliary
24-hour local alarm zone protecting anything that
opens and closes. ‡ Auxiliary Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
24 Local Instant
Auxiliary
24-hour local alarm zone protecting anything that
opens and closes. Sirens shut off at restoral. * Auxiliary Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
25 Local Special
Chime
Notify the user when a door is opened. Sounds emit
from a local annunciator. *
Special
Chime Instant √1, 2, 3
26 Fire 24-hour fire, rate-of-rise heat, and smoke sensors. Fire Instant √ √ √ 1, 2, 3
Concord
91
Cross-Zoning
Note
Cross-Zoning is not recom-
mended for exit/entry zones.
Each zone has the ability to
individually protect the
intended area. (e.g. motion
detector patterns overlap).
Cross-Zone (Alarm Verify) refers to two different Group 10-20 sensors that must be tripped
within four minutes of each other to report an alarm to the central station. The diagram in the fig-
ure below shows the path of a person walking from the kitchen to the living room. When the per-
son is detected walking through the kitchen, the motion sensor in the kitchen is tripped, sounding
a local alarm. If motion is detected by the living room motion sensor within four minutes, an
alarm report will be sent to the central station.
27 Output Module Hardwire Output Module (HOM) lamp control or other
customer feature. ‡ Silent Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
28 Output Module HOM, PIR motion sensor, sound sensor or pressure
mat. ‡ Silent Instant √1, 2, 3
29 Auxiliary Freeze sensor. Auxiliary Instant √ √ √ 1, 2, 3
32 Output Module HOM, PIR motion sensor, sound sensor or pressure
mat.‡ Silent Instant
33 Siren Wireless Siren Supervision. ‡ Silent Instant √ √ 1, 2, 3
34 Gas Carbon monoxide (CO) Gas Detectors ‡ Auxiliary Instant √ √ √ 1, 2, 3
35
Local Instant
Police (Day
Zone)
Local alarm in levels 1 and 2. Report to CS in level 3. Police Instant √ √ √
(level 3
only)
1, 2, 3
38 Auxiliary Water sensor ‡ Auxiliary Instant √ √ √ 1, 2, 3
Note: Check marks (√) represent characteristics present in a group.
* This group is not certified as a primary protection circuit for UL-listed systems and is for supplementary use only.
† Sounds instant police siren if two or more sensors are tripped within 4 minutes. Otherwise sensors are followers to delayed
sensors. If Alarm Verification is on, group 18 functions like group 17.
‡ This group has not been investigated by UL.
§ This group is required for UL-listed residential fire alarm applications.
Table B1: Sensor Group Characteristics (Continued)
No. Name Application Alarm Delay
Restoral
Supervisory
CS Report
Chime (Level 1)
Active Levels
D i n i n g
R o o m
H a l l
B e d r o o m B e d r o o m
B e d r o o m
P a t h o f P e r s o n W a l k i n g
M o t i o n S e n s o r
D e t e c t i o n P a t h / K i t c h e n M o t i o n S e n s o r
D e t e c t i o n P a t h / L i v i n g R o o m M o t i o n S e n s o r
K i t c h e n
L i v i n g
R o o m
Concord 92
Table B2: Item Numbers and Sensor Text
Item # Sensor
Text Item # Sensor Text Item # Sensor
Text Item # Sensor
Text Item # Sensor Text Item
#Sensor Text
001 Aborted 041 Date 081 Gas 121 North 161 Siren 201 G
002 AC 042 Daughter’s 082 Glass 122 Not 162 Sliding 202 H
003 Access 043 Degrees 083 Goodbye 123 Now 163 Smoke 203 I
004 Active 044 Delay 084 Hallway 124 Number 164 Son’s 204 J
005 Activity 045 Den 085 Heat 125 Off 165 Sound 205 K
006 Alarm 046 Desk 086 Hello 126 Office 166 South 206 L
007 All 047 Detector 087 Help 127 OK 167 Special 207 M
008 AM 048 Dining 088 High 128 On 168 Stairs 208 N
009 Area 049 Disarmed 089 Home 129 Open 169 Stay 209 O
010 Arm 050 Door 090 House 130 Opening 170 Supervisory 210 P
011 Armed 051 Down 091 In 131 Panic 171 System 211 Q
012 Arming 052 Download 092 Install 132 Partition 172 Tamper 212 R
013 Attic 053 Downstairs 093 Interior 133 Patio 173 Temperature 213 S
014 Auxiliary 054 Drawer 094 Intrusion 134 Pet 174 Test 214 T
015 Away 055 Driveway 095 Invalid 135 Phone 175 Time 215 U
016 Baby 056 Duct 096 Is 136 Please 176 To 216 V
017 Back 057 Duress 097 Key 137 PM 177 Touchpad 217 W
018 Bar 058 East 098 Kids 138 Police 178 Trouble 218 X
019 Basement 059 Energy Saver 099 Kitchen 139 Pool 179 Unbypass 219 Y
020 Bathroom 060 Enter 100 Latchkey 140 Porch 180 Unit 220 Z
021 Battery 061 Entry 101 Laundry 141 Power 181 Up 221 (space)
022 Bedroom 062 Error 102 Left 142 Press 182 West 222 ’(apostrophe)
023 Bottom 063 Exit 103 Level 143 Program 183 Window 223 - (dash)
024 Breezeway 064 Exterior 104 Library 144 Progress 184 Zone 224 _ (underscore)
025 Building 065 Factory 105 Light 145 Quiet 185 0 225 *
026 Bus 066 Failure 106 Lights 146 Rear 186 1 226 #
027 Bypass 067 Family 107 Living 147 Receiver 187 2 227 :
028 Bypassed 068 Father’s 108 Load 148 Report 188 3 228 /
029 Cabinet 069 Feature 109 Loading 149 RF 189 4 229 ?
030 Canceled 070 Fence 110 Low 150 Right 190 5
031 Car 071 Fire 111 Lower 151 Room 191 6
032 Carbon
Monoxide 072 First 112 Main 152 Safe 192 7
033 Central 073 Floor 113 Master 153 Schedule 193 8
034 Chime 074 Force 114 Mat 154 Screen 194 9
035 Closed 075 Foyer 115 Medical 155 Second 195 A
036 Closet 076 Freeze 116 Memory 156 Sensor 196 B
037 Closing 077 Front 117 Menu 157 Service 197 C
038 Code 078 Furnace 118 Mother’s 158 Shed 198 D
039 Computer 079 Gallery 119 Motion 159 Shock 199 E
040 Control 080 Garage 120 No 160 Side 200 F
Concord
93
Table B3: System Event Trigger Numbers
System Event Description Trigger No.
Null Trigger (used for direct control) Activated only by schedule or direct command. 000
Fire Alarm When Fire sirens are started. 001
Police Alarm When Police sirens are started. 002
Auxiliary Alarm When Auxiliary sirens are started. 003
Any Audible Alarm When any of the above sirens are started. 004
Silent Alarm (sensor groups 2, 3, and duress) When a group 2 or 3 sensor goes into alarm or when a duress
alarm is activated (does not include groups 25, 27, 28, or 32). 005
Any Audible or Silent Alarm When any alarm is started (does not include groups 25, 27, 28,
or 32). 006
HOM Group 27, 28, 32 in Alarm When a sensor in group 27, 28, or 32 goes into alarm. 007
Major Trouble (phone or receiver failure) When a receiver failure (S94) or a phone failure (S96) occurs. 008
Arming to STAY or AWAY When the system is armed to level 2 or 3. 009
Arming to AWAY When the system is armed to level 3. 010
AVM is Interactive (audio session in progress) When the central station operator begins listening or talking to
the premises. 011
Fail-to-Communicate (panel can’t call CS or pager) When the fail-to-communicate output is activated. 012
AVM Trip (edge) When an AVM alarm occurs, output is activated momentarily. 013
Keychain Touchpad Star Button-Press When the star button on a keychain touchpad is pressed. 014
Smoke Power (for resetting 4-wire smoke detectors) Deactivated when hardwire smoke detectors need to be reset. 015
Exterior Siren Activated for police or fire alarms. 016
Interior Siren Activation follows all system noises 017
AVM Trip (pulse) When an AVM alarm occurs, output is deactivated for 10 ms 018
State of System Status Follows the state of system status (ready or trouble). 019
Tamper Condition When any tamper is tripped 020
Closing Report Sent When a closing report has been successfully transmitted to the
central station. 021
Arming to Level 1 When the system is disarmed. 022
Group XX in Alarm When any sensor in group XX goes into alarm Table B4
Sensor XX in Alarm When sensor number XX goes into alarm Table B5
Sensor XX Open When sensor number XX is opened Table B5
Concord 94
Table B4: Sensor Group Event Trigger Numbers
Sensor Group Trigger No. Sensor Group Trigger No.
Group 00 in alarm 064 Group 17 in alarm 081
Group 01 in alarm 065 Group 18 in alarm 082
Group 02 in alarm 066 Group 19 in alarm 083
Group 03 in alarm 067 Group 20 in alarm 084
Group 04 in alarm 068 Group 21 in alarm 085
Group 05 in alarm 069 Group 22 in alarm 086
Group 06 in alarm 070 Group 23 in alarm 087
Group 07 in alarm 071 Group 24 in alarm 088
Group 08 in alarm 072 Group 25 in alarm 089
Group 09 in alarm 073 Group 26 in alarm 090
Group 10 in alarm 074 Group 27 in alarm 091
Group 11 in alarm 075 Group 28 in alarm 092
Group 12 in alarm 076 Group 29 in alarm 093
Group 13 in alarm 077 Group 32 in alarm 096
Group 14 in alarm 078 Group 33 in alarm 097
Group 15 in alarm 079 Group 34 in alarm 098
Group 16 in alarm 080 Group 35 in alarm 099
Table B5: Sensor Number Event Trigger Numbers
Sensor Number State Trigger No. State Trigger No.
Sensor 01 in alarm 129 open 257
Sensor 02 in alarm 130 open 258
Sensor 03 in alarm 131 open 259
Sensor 04 in alarm 132 open 260
Sensor 05 in alarm 133 open 261
Sensor 06 in alarm 134 open 262
Sensor 07 in alarm 135 open 263
Sensor 08 in alarm 136 open 264
Sensor 09 in alarm 137 open 265
Sensor 10 in alarm 138 open 266
Sensor 11 in alarm 139 open 267
Sensor 12 in alarm 140 open 268
Sensor 13 in alarm 141 open 269
Sensor 14 in alarm 142 open 270
Sensor 15 in alarm 143 open 271
Sensor 16 in alarm 144 open 272
Sensor 17 in alarm 145 open 273
Sensor 18 in alarm 146 open 274
Sensor 19 in alarm 147 open 275
Sensor 20 in alarm 148 open 276
Concord
95
Sensor 21 in alarm 149 open 277
Sensor 22 in alarm 150 open 278
Sensor 23 in alarm 151 open 279
Sensor 24 in alarm 152 open 280
Sensor 25 in alarm 153 open 281
Sensor 26 in alarm 154 open 282
Sensor 27 in alarm 155 open 283
Sensor 28 in alarm 156 open 284
Sensor 29 in alarm 157 open 285
Sensor 30 in alarm 158 open 286
Sensor 31 in alarm 159 open 287
Sensor 32 in alarm 160 open 288
Sensor 33 in alarm 161 open 289
Sensor 34 in alarm 162 open 290
Sensor 35 in alarm 163 open 291
Sensor 36 in alarm 164 open 292
Sensor 37 in alarm 165 open 293
Sensor 38 in alarm 166 open 294
Sensor 39 in alarm 167 open 295
Sensor 40 in alarm 168 open 296
Sensor 41 in alarm 169 open 297
Sensor 42 in alarm 170 open 298
Sensor 43 in alarm 171 open 299
Sensor 44 in alarm 172 open 300
Sensor 45 in alarm 173 open 301
Sensor 46 in alarm 174 open 302
Sensor 47 in alarm 175 open 303
Sensor 48 in alarm 176 open 304
Sensor 49 in alarm 177 open 305
Sensor 50 in alarm 178 open 306
Sensor 51 in alarm 179 open 307
Sensor 52 in alarm 180 open 308
Sensor 53 in alarm 181 open 309
Sensor 54 in alarm 182 open 310
Sensor 55 in alarm 183 open 311
Sensor 56 in alarm 184 open 312
Sensor 57 in alarm 185 open 313
Sensor 58 in alarm 186 open 314
Sensor 59 in alarm 187 open 315
Sensor 60 in alarm 188 open 316
Sensor 61 in alarm 189 open 317
Sensor 62 in alarm 190 open 318
Table B5: Sensor Number Event Trigger Numbers
Sensor Number State Trigger No. State Trigger No.
Concord 96
Sensor 63 in alarm 191 open 319
Sensor 64 in alarm 192 open 320
Sensor 65 in alarm 193 open 321
Sensor 66 in alarm 194 open 322
Sensor 67 in alarm 195 open 323
Sensor 68 in alarm 196 open 324
Sensor 69 in alarm 197 open 325
Sensor 70 in alarm 198 open 326
Sensor 71 in alarm 199 open 327
Sensor 72 in alarm 200 open 328
Sensor 73 in alarm 201 open 329
Sensor 74 in alarm 202 open 330
Sensor 75 in alarm 203 open 331
Sensor 76 in alarm 204 open 332
Sensor 77 in alarm 205 open 333
Sensor 78 in alarm 206 open 334
Sensor 79 in alarm 207 open 335
Sensor 80 in alarm 208 open 336
Sensor 81 in alarm 209 open 337
Sensor 82 in alarm 210 open 338
Sensor 83 in alarm 211 open 339
Sensor 84 in alarm 212 open 340
Sensor 85 in alarm 213 open 341
Sensor 86 in alarm 214 open 342
Sensor 87 in alarm 215 open 343
Sensor 88 in alarm 216 open 344
Sensor 89 in alarm 217 open 345
Sensor 90 in alarm 218 open 346
Sensor 91 in alarm 219 open 347
Sensor 92 in alarm 220 open 348
Sensor 93 in alarm 221 open 349
Sensor 94 in alarm 222 open 350
Sensor 95 in alarm 223 open 351
Sensor 96 in alarm 224 open 352
Table B5: Sensor Number Event Trigger Numbers
Sensor Number State Trigger No. State Trigger No.
Concord
97
Table B6: System Feature Event Trigger Numbers
Feature State Trigger No.
Phone Test initiated 225
AC Failure for 15 minutes 226
CPU Low Battery detected (excluding first minute after power-up) 227
Auto Phone Test begun 228
Receiver Failure detected 229
Back In Service alarm (AC loss, battery drain, then AC restore) 230
Phone Failure detected 231
Buffer Full detected 232
Two Trip Error detected 233
System Tamper alarm (40 incorrect code entry keystrokes) 236
Freeze alarm 237
No Activity alarm 238
Fire Panic alarm 239
Police Panic alarm 240
Auxiliary Panic alarm 241
Opening Report occurred 242
Closing Report occurred 243
Latchkey Opening or Closing occurred 244
Duress alarm 245
Force Armed Report occurred 246
Fire in Partition alarm 247
Recent Closing Report occurred 248
Sensor Test entered 249
Table B7: Response Characteristics
Response
Characteristics Description
Momentary trip time The point will remain activated for nn seconds (n is 1-12 seconds).
The default is 4 seconds
3 minute trip time The point will remain activated for 3 minutes
Siren-time trip time The point will remain activated while the interior siren is sounding
Sustained trip time The point will remain activated for the duration of the event
Siren pattern
The point will activate and deactivate according to the current
alarm type:
Auxiliary -- fast on/off/on
Police -- constant on
Fire -- repeating)
Trip delay The point will activate 30 seconds after the trigger event occurs
Concord 98
Notes for Table B8: Response Numbers
Note
The mechanical lifetime of
the relay may be exceeded if
an output is set up for a siren
tracking response and a
pulsing siren (auxiliary or
fire) is active for long time
periods. A SnapCard relay
output’s lifetime expectancy
is about 350 total pulsing
hours.
1. If an event does not trigger sirens, siren tracking response numbers activate without turning
on the output. If sirens are triggered by another event, the output pulses to match the siren.
If the siren cadence changes (from police to fire, for example), outputs set up for siren track-
ing change to match the siren and all pulsing outputs pulse to one common cadence.
2. If an event does not trigger sirens, siren time response times activate outputs only if sirens
are active for another reason.
3. If an alarm event does not necessarily require disarming (no activity, closing report, etc.),
outputs set up for a sustained response time remain activated until the next arming level
change.
4. If an event occurs that activates an output set up for trip delay, the delay and output activa-
tion can be canceled by trigger event restoral.
Note
The trip delay is factory set
for 30 seconds and cannot
be changed.
5. Activated outputs set up for a 3-minute response time remain active for the entire three min-
utes. To deactivate the output before the 3-minute time expires, you must enter program
mode or remove panel power.
Activated outputs set up for a momentary or 3-minute response time restart if the same trig-
ger event occurs again.
Table B8: Response Numbers
Siren
Tracking Trip Delay Response
Time
Response
No.
no no momentary 00
no no 3 minutes501
no no siren time202
no no sustained303
no yes4momentary 04
no yes43 minutes505
no yes4siren time206
no yes4sustained307
yes1no momentary 08
yes1no 3 minutes509
yes1no siren time210
yes1no sustained311
yes1yes4momentary 12
yes1yes43 minutes513
yes1yes4siren time214
yes1yes4sustained315
Concord
99
Concord 100
Appendix C: Settings
Tier 1 Menus Tier 2 Menus
#`
_
B`
_A
B`
_A
BdcA#dc #dc
Demo Kit
On Off GLOBAL B`
_APARTITION CS PHONE 1 B`
_ACS PHONE 2 B`
_ACS PHONE 3
BdcA#dc #dc #dc #dc #dc
Partition 1 Copy Downloader Code
12345
(0000)
Account Number
00000
(0010 - 0060)
Phone Number
None
(01000)
Phone Number
None
(01010)
Phone Number
None
(01020)
BdcABdcABdcABABdcABdcA
Clear Memory Installer Code
4321
(0001)
Quick Arm
On Off
(0011 - 0061)
High Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01001)
High Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01011)
High Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01021)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Exit Programming Dealer Code
* * * *
(0002)
Quick Exit
On Off
(0012 - 0062)
Low Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01002)
Low Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01012)
Low Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01022)
#BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Access Code Lock
On Off
(0003)
Exit Extension
On Off
(0013 - 0063)
Exception Rpts
On Off
(01003)
Exception Rpts
On Off
(01013)
Exception Rpts
On Off
(01023)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Ptn Security
On Off
(0004)
Auto Stay Arming
On Off
(0014 - 0064)
Open/Close Rpts
On Off
(01004)
Open/Close Rpts
On Off
(01014)
Open/Close Rpts
On Off
(01024)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Multi Ptn Arm
On Off
(0005)
Keyswitch Sensor
On Off
(0015 - 0065)
Backup
On Off
(01005)
Backup
On Off
(01015)
Backup
On Off
(01025)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Keychain TP Ptn
(0006)
Keyswitch Style
Transition State
(0016 - 0066)
Reporting Format
SIA CID
(01006)
Reporting Format
SIA CID
(01016)
Reporting Format
SIA CID
(01026)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
SIA False Alarm
On Off
(0007)
Duress Code
* * * *
(0017 - 0067)
Cellular Backup
On Off
(01007)
Cellular Backup
On Off
(01017)
Cellular Backup
On Off
(01027)
Concord
101
B`
_A
#dc
PAGER 1 B`
_APAGER 2 B`
_APAGER 3 B`
_APAGER 4 B`
_APAGER 5 B`
_A
DOWNLOADER
PHONE
#dc #dc #dc #dc #dc #dc
Phone Number
None
(01030)
Phone Number
None
(01040)
Phone Number
None
(01050)
Phone Number
None
(01060)
Phone Number
None
(01070)
Phone Number
None
01090
B A BdcABdcABABdcA
High Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01031)
High Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01041)
High Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01051)
High Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01061)
High Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01071)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Low Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01032)
Low Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01042)
Low Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01052)
Low Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01062)
Low Lvl Rpts
On Off
(01072)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Exception Rpts
On Off
(01033)
Exception Rpts
On Off
(01043)
Exception Rpts
On Off
(01053)
Exception Rpts
On Off
(01063)
Exception Rpts
On Off
(01073)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Open/Close Rpts
On Off
(01034)
Open/Close Rpts
On Off
(01044)
Open/Close Rpts
On Off
(01054)
Open/Close Rpts
On Off
(01064)
Open/Close Rpts
On Off
(01074)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Latchkey Rpts
On Off
(01035)
Latchkey Rpts
On Off
(01045)
Latchkey Rpts
On Off
(01055)
Latchkey Rpts
On Off
(01065)
Latchkey Rpts
On Off
(01075)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Streamlining
On Off
(01036)
Streamlining
On Off
(01046)
Streamlining
On Off
(01056)
Streamlining
On Off
(01066)
Streamlining
On Off
(01076)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Ptn Assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6
(01037)
Ptn Assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6
(01047)
Ptn Assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6
(01057)
Ptn Assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6
(01067)
Ptn Assignment
1 2 3 4 5 6
(01077)
Concord 102
B`
_A
B`
_A
B`
_A
B`
_A
#dc #dc #dc
GLOBAL B`
_APARTITION GLOBAL B`
_APARTITION PARTITION
#dc #dc #dc #dc #dc
Phone Test
On Off
(02000)
Local Phone Ctrl
On Off
(0210 - 0260)
Supervisory Time
1:00 - 4:00 (Random)
(0300)
Entry Delay
30 sec (30-240)
(0310 - 0360)
Entry Lights
None (3-9)
(0400 - 0450)
BdcABdcABdcABdcABdcA
Auto Phone Test
On Off
(02001)
Remote Access
On Off
(0211 - 0261)
RF Tx Timeout
12 hours (2-24)
(0302)
Exit Delay
60 sec (45-184)
(0011 - 0061)
House Code
1B 2C 3D 4E 5F 6G
(0401 - 0451)
BdcABdcABdcABdcA
Auto Test Reset
On Off
(02002)
Ring/Hang/Ring
On Off
(0212 - 0262)
Phone Test Freq.
7 days (1-255)
(0303)
Extended Delay
4 min (1-8)
(0312 - 0362)
BdcABdcABdcABdcA
Comm Failure
On Off
(02003)
Line Fail Delay
None (10-240 sec)
(0213—Ptn 1 only)
Next Phone test
7 days (1-255)
(0304)
Siren Timeout
4 min (1-30)
(0313 - 0363)
BdcABdcABdcABdcA
DTMF Dialing
On Off
(02004)
Toll Saver
On Off
(0214 - 0264)
Output Trip Time
4 sec (1-12)
(0305)
Sleep Time
22:00 (00:00-23:50)
(0314 - 0364)
BdcABdcABdcABdcA
Dialer Abort
On Off
(02006)
Phone Panic
On Off
(0215 - 0265)
Activity Timeout
24 hours (1-42)
(0306)
No Usage time
(0315 - 0365)
BdcABdcABdcA
Dial Abort Delay
30 sec (15-120)
(02007)
Phone ACC Key
#
(0216 - 0266)
Daylight Saving
On Off
(0307)
BdcA
Cancel Message
On Off
(02008)
BdcA
Pager Delay
15 sec (0-30)
(02009)
BdcA
Call Wait Cancel
On Off
020010)
BdcA
Dial Tone Detect
On Off
(02011)
Concord
103
B`
_A
B`
_A
#dc #dc
GLOBAL B`
_APARTITION GLOBAL B`
_APARTITION
#dc #dc #dc #dc
Latchkey Zones
None (1-96)
(0500)
Fire Panic
On Off
(0510 - 0560)
24-Hour Tamper
On Off
(06000)
Opening Reports
On Off
(06100 - 06600)
BdcABdcABdcA
Auxiliary Panic
On Off
(0511 - 0561)
Antenna Tamper
On Off
(06001)
Closing Reports
On Off
(06101 - 06601)
BdcABdcABdcA
Police Panic
On Off
(0512 - 0562)
Buffer Control
On Off
(06002)
Recent Closings
On Off
(06102 - 06602)
BdcABdcABdcA
Keychain TP Arm
On Off
(0513 - 0563)
Back In Service
On Off
(06003)
No Activity
On Off
(06103 - 06603)
BdcABdcABdcA
Star is No Delay
On Off
(0514 - 0564)
Bypass Reports
On Off
(06004)
Duress Option
On Off
(06104 - 06604)
BdcABdcA
Low CPU Battery
On Off
(06005)
Force Armed
On Off
(06105 - 06605)
BdcABdcA
Battery Restoral
On Off
(06006)
Latchkey Format
On Off
(06106 - 06606)
BdcABdcA
Buffer Full Report
On Off
(06007)
Freeze Alarm
On Off
(06107 - 06607)
BdcABdcA
Zone Restorals
On Off
(06008)
Freeze Temp
On Off
(06108 - 06608)
BdcABdcA
Two Trip Error
On Off
(06009)
Alarm Verify
On Off
(06109 - 06609)
BdcABdcA
TP Panic Rpt Fmt
On Off
(06010)
System Tamper
On Off
(06110 - 06610)
BdcABdcA
AC Failure
On Off
(06011)
Report Confirm
On Off
(06112 - 06612)
BdcA
Receiver Failure
On Off
(06012)
Bdc
RF Low Bat Rpt
On Off
(06013)
B`
_A
RF Supv Rpt
On Off
(06014)
B`
_A
Swinger Limit
1 (1-2)
(06015)
B`
_A
Aux Power Fail
On Off
(06016)
Concord 104
B`
_A
B`
_A
#dc #dc #dc
GLOBAL B`
_APARTITION LEARN SENSORS
(080)
B`
_A
SENSOR TEXT
(081)
B`
_A
DELETE SENSORS
(082)
B`
_A
EDIT SENSORS
(083)
#dc #dc #dc #dc #dc #dc
Immediate Beeps
On Off
(0700)
Siren Verify
On Off
(0710—Ptn 1 only)
Sensor Partition
1 2 3 4 5 6
Text for Sensor
n
Delete Sensor
n
Sn P1 Gnn
NC/NO/TP
RF/HW
BdcA#dc #dc #dc A#dc
Disable Trbl Beeps
On Off
(0701)
Sensor Group
0
Sensor n Item 0
0 - Delete Sensor n
Done
Sensor Partition
n
BdcA#dc #dc
UL 98 Options
On Off
(0702)
Trip Sensor
n
Sensor Group
n
BdcA
Global Fire
On Off
(0703)
BdcA
Silent Panic
On Off
(0704)
Concord
105
B`
_A
B`
_A
#dc #dc
PARTITION 1 BUS DEVICE B`
_A
SNAPCARDS
(see next page)
#dc #dc
Audio Verify
On Off
(09000)
Unit - ID
On Off
(10000 - 10015)
BdcA#dc
Audio Mode
1
(09001)
CHANGE ID B`
_A
Device ID
nnnnn
BdcA#dc
Fire Shutdown
On Off
(09002)
DEVICE
PARTITION
B`
_A
Partition Assign
1 2 3 4 5 6
BdcA#dc
Silent Talkback
On Off
(09003)
KEYPAD OPTIONS B`
_A
Status Beeps
On Off B`
_A
Key Beeps
On Off
BdcA#dc
Access Timeout
90 sec (30-300)
(09004)
ENERGY OPTIONS B`
_A
Freeze Temp
42° F (40°-90° F) B`
_A
Temperature
40°-90° F B`
_A
Temperature
40°-90° F
BdcA#dc
Beep Delay
2 sec (0-300)
(09005)
OUTPUTS B`
_A
Output n B`
_A
Partition Assign
1 2 3 4 5 6 B`
_A
Configuration
* * * * *
BdcA#dc
Access Code
* * * *
(09006)
CELLULAR
OPTIONS
B`
_A
Cellular System
A B
BdcA
VOX Mic Gain
14 (01-64)
(09007)
BdcA
VOX Gain Range
64 (01-64)
(09008)
BdcA
Manual Mic Gain
04 (cannot change)
(09009)
BdcA
VOX RX Gain
04 (01-10)
(09010)
Concord 106
B`
_ASNAPCARDS
#dc
OUTPUT
PROGRAMMING
B`
_AOUTPUT TEXT
#dc #dc
OUTPUT 1 #`
_
Partition Assign
1 2 3 4 5 6
(101100)
B`
_A
Configuration
01400
(101101)
OUTPUT 1
(10120)
#`
_
Output 1
Item n
BdcABdcA
OUTPUT 2 #`
_
Partition Assign
1 2 3 4 5 6
(101110)
B`
_A
Configuration
00410
(101111)
OUTPUT 2
(10121)
#`
_
Output 2
Item n
BdcABdcA
OUTPUT 3 #`
_
Partition Assign
1 2 3 4 5 6
(101120)
B`
_A
Configuration
00903
(101121)
OUTPUT 3
(10122)
#`
_
Output 3
Item n
BdcABdcA
OUTPUT 4 #`
_
Partition Assign
1 2 3 4 5 6
(101130)
B`
_A
Configuration
40°-90° F
(101131)
OUTPUT 4
(10123)
#`
_
Output 4
Item n
B`
_A
#dc
INPUTS B`
_A
OUTPUT
PROGRAMMING
B`
_AOUTPUT TEXT
#dc #dc #dc
Smoke Verify
On Off
(1100)
OUTPUT 1 B`
_AOUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1
(1120)
B`
_A
OUTPUT 2
(1121)
BdcA#dc #dc #dc #dc
Two-Wire Smoke
On Off
(1101
Partition Assign
1 2 3 4 5 6
(11100)
Partition Assign
1 2 3 4 5 6
(11110)
Output 1
Item n
Output 2
Item n
BdcABdcA
Configuration
00410
(11101)
Configuration
00410
(11111)
Concord
107
Concord 108
System Wiring
Notes Note 1
Class II power transformer must be plugged into an unswitched AC power receptacle. Do
not short the transformer terminals together. The transformer contains an internal fuse that
permanently disables the output if the terminals are shorted.
Note 2
An alphanumeric touchpad is required for on-site programming.
Note 3
Speaker terminals 7 and 8 activate only for alarms in partition 1. Use speakers with an 8-
ohm or higher impedance. Use 18-gauge, stranded wire. When connecting two or more 8-
ohm speakers, they must be wired in series as shown in the wiring diagram. Wiring two or
more 8-ohm speakers in parallel can permanently damage the panel.
Note 4
Onboard output 1 is a switched +12V rated for 1,000 mA maximum and output 2 is an open-
collector type rated for 300 mA maximum. Output 1 defaults to configuration number 01614
(exterior siren). Output 2 defaults to configuration number 01710 (interior siren). Refer to
panel installation instructions for all possible settings.
Note 5
Zone (loop) wiring shown is an example that applies to all zones (except when zone 8 is con-
figured for 2-wire smoke detectors). Install EOL resistors across all unused zone (loop)
inputs.
Note 6
For UL Listed installations, wire multiple supervised 2-wire hardwire smoke detectors (20
maximum) only as shown. Maximum 100 uA current draw per detector. Maximum 100 mA
current draw in alarm. See page 12 for tested compatible models.
Note 7
Some telephones are polarity-sensitive. Green and red wires may need to be reversed.
Note 8
A maximum of two Audio Verification Modules (60-677) are allowed (partition 1 only).
Wire multiple speakers in series, and power and microphone wires in parallel. Use shielded
cable where shown in diagram to prevent cross-talk between the speaker and microphone.
Audio Verification Modules shall not be used in UL Listed installations.
Note 9
Connect multiple piezo sirens in parallel.
Note 10
Refer to the SuperBus 2000 Energy Saver Module Installation Instructions for thermostat
wiring details.
Note 11
Wire Hardwire Module zone (loop) inputs as shown for the panel. Install EOL resistors
across all unused zone (loop) inputs. Refer to the Module Installation Instructions for com-
plete details.
Note 12
Without AC power, panel shutdown occurs if battery voltage falls below 10.2 VDC.
L P
-
+
L N
12 3 4 5 61 0 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 2 0 2 1 2 2
1 6 . 5 V A C + 1 2 V A B U S B O U T 2
G N D M I C G N D Z O N E 1 Z O N E 3
Z O N E 2 G N D Z O N E 4 Z O N E 6
G N D Z O N E 5 G N D
2 3 2 4 2 5
Z O N E 7
2 W S M K
Z O N E 8 G R N
+
-
+
-
789
SPEAKER O U T 1
2 6 2 7 2 8
78
B R N G R Y R E D
6
12 3 4 5
1
+ 1 2 V
2
A
3
B
4
G N D
5
G N D
6
S P K 1
7
S P K 2
8
A U D 1
9
A U D 2
1 0
G N D
1 1
T I P 1
1 2
T I P 2
1 3
R I N G
2
1 4
R I N G
1
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V AB
G N D B U S
2 6 2 7 2 8
2 5
78
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6
Z O N E C O M M O N
Z O N E 1
Z O N E 2
Z O N E 3
Z O N E 4
Z O N E 5
Z O N E C O M M O N
Z O N E C O M M O N
Z O N E 6
Z O N E 7
Z O N E C O M M O N
Z O N E 8
N O 1
N C 1
C O M 1
Z O N E 1
N O 2
N C 2
C O M 2
N O 3
N C 3
C O M 3
N O 4
N C 4
C O M 4
Z O N E C O M
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8
1 1
+ 1 2 V
T E L C O
H O U S E
A
1 1
+ 1 2 V
SPEAKER
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V AB
G N D B U S
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V AB
G N D B U S
3 4 5 6
+ 1 2 V AB
G N D B U S
F U R T H E R + 1 2 V AB
B U S G N D
7 8
SPEAKER
3 4
+ 1 2 V
G N D
1 2
M I C
3456
+ 1 2 V AB
G N D B U S
+ 1 2 V ABG N D
G R N B R N G R Y R E D
Class II
16.5 VAC
40 VA
NOTE 1: Class II Power
Transformer
(600-1023 or 600-1024)
NOTE 2:
SuperBus 2000 2x16
LCD Alphanumeric Touchpad
(60-746-01) shown.
Others similar.
NOTE 3:
8-Ohm, 15-watt
Speaker (13-060)
NOTE 4: Piezo Dynamic Exterior
Siren (13-950)
Red Black
NOTE 4:
Hardwire
Interior Siren
(13-949)
GND #1
NOTE 5:
Normally
Open (N/O)
Contacts in
Parallel
NOTE 5:
Normally
Closed (N/C)
Contacts
in Series
NOTE 5:
Normally
Closed (N/C)
Contacts
in Series
2k-Ohm EOL Resistor (49-454)
(Locate at last device)
2k-Ohm EOL
Resistor (49-454)
(Locate at last device)
NOTE 5:
PIR Motion
Sensor (13-082)
NOTES 3 & 8: Interrogator 200
Audio Verification Module (60-677)
NOTE 3: Hardwire Interior Speaker (60-528)
To Panel Terminals 7 & 8
or
SuperBus 2000 Phone
Interface/Voice Module
Terminals 6 & 7
Not
Used
Other SuperBus 2000 Module Connections
To
To
Thermostat
Furnace
NOTE 10:
SuperBus
2000 Energy
Saver Module
(60-620-01)
NOTE 10:
SuperBus
2000 8Z Input
Module
(60-774)
NOTE 10:
SuperBus
2000 4-Relay
Output Module
(60-770)
NOTES 3 & 7: SuperBus 2000 Phone Interface/Voice Module (60-777-01)
(Partition 1
Voice Module
Only)
SuperBus 2000 319.5 MHz
RF Transceiver Module
(600-xxxxx-95R) (4 maximum)
GRN
BRN
RED
GRY
REDGRN
GRY
BRN
RING
(-)
TIP
(+)
RED
GRN
BLK WHT
or
YEL
BRN GRY
REDGRN
RED
GRN
TO
PHONE
JACKS
TELCO
Protector
Block
Separate wire
cables
NOTE 7:
RJ-31X
(CA-38A)
Phone
Jack
DB-8 Cord
NOTE 7:
RJ-31X CA-38A)
Phone Jack
NOTE 6:
2-Wire
Smoke
Detectors
